E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10 - Page 1All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
All rights reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
EVOLIUM - E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10
EVOLIUME-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10
TRAINING MANUAL
3FL11830ACAAWBZZA2Edition 02
Copyright © 2007 by Alcatel-Lucent - All rights reservedPassing on and copying of this document, use and
communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10 - Page 2All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description
B10
2
Legal Notice
� Switch to notes view!Safety Warning
Both lethal and dangerous voltages are present within the equipment. Do not wear conductive jewelry
while working on the equipment. Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the
equipment alone.
Caution
The equipment used during this course is electrostatic sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static
precautions.
Trade Marks
Alcatel and MainStreet are trademarks of Alcatel.
All other trademarks, service marks and logos (“Marks”) are the property of their respective holders
including Alcatel-Lucent. Users are not permitted to use these Marks without the prior consent of Alcatel
or such third party owning the Mark. The absence of a Mark identifier is not a representation that a
particular product or service name is not a Mark.
Copyright
This document contains information that is proprietary to Alcatel-Lucent and may be used for training
purposes only. No other use or transmission of all or any part of this document is permitted without
Alcatel-Lucent’s written permission, and must include all copyright and other proprietary notices. No
other use or transmission of all or any part of its contents may be used, copied, disclosed or conveyed to
any party in any manner whatsoever without prior written permission from Alcatel-Lucent.
Use or transmission of all or any part of this document in violation of any applicable Canadian or other
legislation is hereby expressly prohibited.
User obtains no rights in the information or in any product, process, technology or trademark which it
includes or describes, and is expressly prohibited from modifying the information or creating derivative
works without the express written consent of Alcatel-Lucent.
Alcatel-Lucent, The Alcatel-Lucent logo, MainStreet and Newbridge are registered trademarks of Alcatel-
Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no
responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change without notice.
© 2007 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
In no event will Alcatel-Lucent be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential
damages, including lost profits, lost business or lost data, resulting from the use of or reliance upon the
information, whether or not Alcatel has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Mention of non-Alcatel-Lucent products or services is for information purposes only and constitutes
neither an endorsement nor a recommendation.
Please refer to technical practices supplied by Alcatel-Lucent for current information concerning Alcatel-
Lucent equipment and its operation.
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10 - Page 3All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description
B10
3
Table of Contents
� Switch to notes view!1. Radio Algorithms
1. Principles
2. Radio Resource management
3. Radio Link Control
4. Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
5. Appendix
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10 - Page 4All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description
B10
4
Table of Contents [cont.]
� Switch to notes view!
This page is left blank intentionally
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10 - Page 5All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description
B10
5
Course Objectives
� Switch to notes view!
Welcome to E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10
After successful completion of this course, you should understand :
� How to describe the main (E)GPRS mechanisms and concepts
� How to describe the radio algorithms and the related parameters
� How to estimate qualitatively the impact of a parameter change in order to solve typical
problems or enhance the GPRS performance
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10 - Page 6All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description
B10
6
Course Objectives [cont.]
� Switch to notes view!
This page is left blank intentionally
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10 - Page 7All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description
B10
7
About this Student Guide
� Switch to notes view!Conventions used in this guide
Where you can get further information
If you want further information you can refer to the following:
� Technical Practices for the specific product
� Technical support page on the Alcatel website: http://www.alcatel-lucent.com
Note
Provides you with additional information about the topic being discussed.
Although this information is not required knowledge, you might find it useful
or interesting.
Technical Reference (1) 24.348.98 – Points you to the exact section of Alcatel-Lucent Technical
Practices where you can find more information on the topic being discussed.
WarningAlerts you to instances where non-compliance could result in equipment
damage or personal injury.
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10 - Page 8All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description
B10
8
About this Student Guide [cont.]
� Switch to notes view!
This page is left blank intentionally
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10 - Page 9All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description
B10
9
Self-Assessment of Objectives
� At the end of each section you will be asked to fill this questionnaire
� Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training
�
Switch to notes view!
Instructional objectives Yes (or globally yes)
No (or globally no)
Comments
Contract number :
Course title :
Client (Company, Center) :
Language : Dates from : to :
Number of trainees : Location :
Surname, First name :
Did you meet the following objectives ?
Tick the corresponding box
Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training
����
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10 - Page 10All Rights Reserved © 2007, Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2007
EVOLIUM
E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description
B10
10
Self-Assessment of Objectives [cont.]
� Switch to notes view!
Instructional objectives Yes (or Globally yes)
No (or globally no)
Comments
Thank you for your answers to this questionnaire
Other comments
����
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 1
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Do not delete this graphic elements in here:
1�1All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
Module 1Principles
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Section 1Radio Algorithms
EVOLIUME-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10
3FL11830ACAAWBZZA2 Issue 02
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 2
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 2
Blank Page
This page is left blank intentionally
First editionLast name, first nameYYYY-MM-DD01
RemarksAuthorDateEdition
Document History
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 3
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 3
Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
� Describe the main GPRS mechanisms and concepts
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 4
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 4
Module Objectives [cont.]
This page is left blank intentionally
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 5
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 5
Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!Page
1 Service Overview 72 Alcatel-Lucent GPRS Architecture 133 Main Transactions 20
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 6
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 6
Table of Contents [cont.]
Switch to notes view!
This page is left blank intentionally
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 7
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 7
1 Service Overview
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 8
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 8
1 Service Overview
Data Transfer with GSM: Circuit Switching
Internet
GSM
Network
Air InterfaceAccess Node
Circuit switching
� Transaction is offered in connected mode.
� Allocation of a continuous radio resource UL/DL until the completion of the transfer.
� One circuit = one channel allocated per user.
� The traffic multiplexing is achieved inside the BSS, over the Ater interface.
High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD)
� A technology that allows the multislot allocation to one user.
� An important throughput can be achieved (up to 64 Kbit/s constant) but there is no optimization of the
use of the channel.
� (no dynamic allocation when data services are mainly carried in a bursty mode).
� The billing is time based like in GSM.
� Is likely to lead to an important congestion situation.
� Not offered by Alcatel-Lucent.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 9
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 9
1 Service Overview
Data Transfer with GPRS: Packet Switching
GPRS
NetworkInternet
Air Interface
GPRS provides end-to-end packet-switched data transmission between MS users and fixed packet data
networks.
GPRS is a GSM feature.
GPRS provides an efficient use of the radio resources:
� multislot operation,
� Flexible sharing of radio resources between MSs,
� Resources are allocated only when data are transmitted.
Charging is based on the volume of data transmitted, not on connection time.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 10
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 10
1 Service Overview
MS Classes
� Three MS classes are defined:
� class A:
� simultaneous GPRS and GSM traffic (different from Class A DTM MS)
� class B:
� simultaneous GPRS and GSM attach but not simultaneous traffic
� an MS can be paged for a GSM call while performing a GPRS transfer
� class C:
� only GPRS
B10
Do not confuse with the multislot class of an MS, or the MS capacity, which characterizes the number of
TSs one MS can monitor in the UL and the DL simultaneously.
For the detail of the MS multislot class, see the next slide.
The main traffic class available on the market is Class B.
Class C is preferred for PDA devices
A new feature called Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) has been introduced in 3GPP Standard and in the Alcatel-
Lucent B10 release.
Contrary to classical Class A MSs, Class A DTM MSs do not need two independent transmitter/receiver.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 11
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 11
1 Service Overview
MS Multislot Class B10
MS Type
� Type 1 are simplex MSs, i.e., without duplexer: they are not able to transmit and receive at the same time.
� Type 2 are duplex MSs, i.e., with duplexer: they are able to transmit and receive at the same time.
Rx
The maximum number of received time slots that the MS can use per TDMA frame. The received TSs shall be
allocated within window of size Rx, but they do not need to be contiguous. For SIMPLEX MS, no transmitted TS shall
occur between received TSs within a TDMA frame. This does not take into account the measurement window (Mx).
Tx
The maximum number of transmitted time slots that the MS can use per TDMA frame. The transmitted TS shall be
allocated within the window of size Tx, but they do not need to be contiguous. For SIMPLEX MS, no received TS shall
occur between transmitted TSs within a TDMA frame.
SUM
The maximum number of transmitted and received time slots (without Mx) per TDMA frame.
The meaning of Ttb, Tra et Trb changes according to the MS type.
� For SIMPLEX MS (type 1):
� Ttb is the minimum time (in time slot) necessary between the Rx and Tx windows.
� Tra is the minimum time between the last Tx window and the first Rx window of the next TDMA in order to
be able to open a measurement window.
� Trb is the same as Tra without opening a measurement window.
� For DUPLEX MS (type 2):
� Ttb is the minimum time necessary between 2 Tx windows belonging to different frames.
� Tra is the minimum time necessary between 2 Rx windows belonging to different frames in order to be able
to open a measurement window.
� Trb is the same as Tra without opening a measurement window.
EDA
The Extended Dynamic Allocation, is a new B10 feature that allows higher throughput in uplink for type 1 MS.
Through the support of more than two radio TSs (e.g. MS multislot class 11)
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 12
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 12
1 Service Overview
MS Multislot Class [cont.]
� New Multislot classes supported in B10
� Activation with the flag EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33
B10
Multislot
class Rx Tx Sum Tta Ttb Tra Trb PTM DTM
30 5 1 6 2 1 1 1 (5+1)
31 5 2 6 2 1 1 1 (5+1), (4+2) (4+2)
32 5 3 6 2 1 1 1
(5+1), (4+2),
(3+3)/EDA
(4+2),
(3+3)/EDA
33 5 4 6 2 1 1 1
(5+1), (4+2),
(3+3)/EDA,
(2+4)/EDA
(4+2),
(3+3)/EDA,
(2+4)/EDA
34 5 5 6 2 1 1 1
(5+1), (4+2),
(3+3)/EDA,
(2+4)/EDA,
(1+5)/EDA
• Note that DTM multislot classes 30 and 34 do not exist
• PTM multislot class 34 can be supported as multislot class 33
• Multislot 30-33 MS can support bi-directional transfer configurations with up to 5 DL TS.
• EDA necessary to fully support multislot classes 32 and 33
• PTM high multislot classes defined in 3GPP release 5 and,
• DTM high multislot classes defined in 3GPP release 6
• Main benefits :
� More downlink throughput
� PTM mode : up to 5 DL PDCHs instead of 4 (5+1 instead of 4+1)
� DTM mode : up to 3 DL PDCHs instead of 2 (4+2 instead of 3+2)
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 13
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 13
1 Service Overview
MS Multislot Class [cont.]
� PTM MultiSlot Class 11 (4+1):
� DTM MultiSlot Class 11 (2+3):
� MultiSlot Class 11 (2+3) EDA:
� High MultiSlot Class (5+1):
Rx
Mx
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DL
Tx UL
Ttb Tra
Rx Rx Rx
Rx Mx
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DL
Tx
UL
Ttb Tra
Rx Rx
Rx Rx
B10
Multislot class 11:
EDA shall be used in UL for the 1+3, 2+3 and 1+2(1hole) configurations.
DA (Dynamic Allocation) shall be used for all the other configurations (4+1, 3+2, 3+1, 2+2, 2+1, 1+2 and
1+1).
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 14
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 14
2 Alcatel-Lucent GPRS Architecture
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 15
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 15
HLR
Gn
DNS/DHCP
IPBackbone
ChargingGateway
BorderGateway
GGSNInternetIntranet
Gi
PSTNMSC/VLR
MFS
SGSN
Gs Gr
BTS
BTS
Radio Access Network
AbisAterMux
Gb
TC
BSC
GSM Core Network
GPRS & EGPRS Core Network
2 Alcatel-Lucent GPRS Architecture
General Architecture
The BSS is used for both circuit-switched and GPRS services.
A GPRS core network (also called GSS, an IP backbone) offers the interconnection between the PDN and
the BSS.
The BSS has 2 clients:
� The MSC, for circuit-switched services (through the A interface).
� The GPRS backbone network, for packet-switched services (through the Gb interface).
The A interface is unchanged.
PDN X25 is not supported anymore by 3GPP.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 16
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 16
A
Gn
Signaling + data
Pure Signaling
Mobile GPRS
MSCSMS-
GMSC
Gd
Um
GPRS Network
Gb
BSS
Gc
HLR
GsGr
Gi
SGSN
SGSN GGSN
2 Alcatel-Lucent GPRS Architecture
Main Entities - Interfaces
PDN
GPRS network = IP network
Note: Additional IP routers might be used to route the information between the GSNs (intra-PLMN
backbone network). All the elements connected to this backbone have private permanent IP addresses.
Signaling protocols:
� MAP/TCAP/SCCP/MTP on Gr, Gd and Gc (through the SGSN for the latter),
� GTP/UDP/IP on Gn, BSSAP+/SCCP/MTP on Gs,
� GMM/SM/LLC on Gb/Um.
Gc: for Network-Requested PDP contexts Activation (the GGSN asks the HLR for SGSN Routing
Information).
Gs: defines the Network Mode of Operation I. It allows to perform LA + RA combined Location Update,
and PS and CS Paging Coordination.
Gr: exchange of Subscription Information at Attachment Phase.
Additional interfaces:
� Gf (to the EIR).
� Gd to deliver the SMS to the mobiles via the GPRS network (SGSN option and subscriber feature).
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 17
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 17
� A Packet Control Unit is defined by the GSM standard:
� It handles RLC/MAC functions
� It may be in the BTS, in the BSC or, in the SGSN
� Alcatel-Lucent choice:
� PCU in a network element called the MFS
� smooth and cost-effective introduction of the GPRS
BTS
BTS
BSC
BSC
MFS SGSN
Gb
AterMux
2 Alcatel-Lucent GPRS Architecture
PCU
The standard specifies that the PCU function shall be implemented in one of the 3 following entities:
� BTS,
� BSC,
� after the BSC (in the SGSN for instance)
The implementation of the PCU functions determines the position of the Gb interface.
Alcatel-Lucent chooses the MFS integration in order to offer a faster implementation inside the BSS as
well as an easier maintenance and supervision.
MFS: Multi BSS Fast packet Server.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 18
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 18
2 Alcatel-Lucent GPRS Architecture
M-EGCH principle
� An M-EGCH organizes the transmission resources (pool of Abis nibbles and Ater nibbles) given to a TRX for its PS traffic
� 3 types of nibbles are considered
� BASIC nibbles shareable between all TREs of a given cell
� BONUS and EXTRA nibbles shareable between all TREs of a given BTS
TRX 3
TRX 2
TRX 1
Abis Ater
M-EGCH 3
M-EGCH 2
M-EGCH 1
BasicExtraBonus
Basic Abis Nibbles
One Basic Abis nibble is initially linked to one RTS. The number of Basic Abis nibble in a given cell
corresponds to the number of RTS. They have the following characteristics:
� They carry either CS or PS traffic.
� They are shareable at cell level (among all the TREs).
Bonus Abis Nibbles
The basic Abis nibbles whose RTSs are currently used for BCCHs and static SDCCHs are called bonus Abis
nibbles. They have the following characteristics:
� They only carry PS traffic.
� They are shareable at BTS level (among all the TREs).
Extra Abis Nibbles
Considering one (E)GPRS capable BTS, the Operator can defined additional GCHs: the Extra Abis nibbles.
They have the following characteristics:
� They only carry PS traffic.
� They are shareable at BTS level (among all the TREs).
The multiplexing capacity of the GCH link on the AterMux belongs to the granularity chosen. 1 Ater TS
GPRS dedicated = 1 GCH when allocated.
The number of 64 Kbit/s time slots assigned to PS traffic and signaling is configured by the Operator from
the OMC-R, with the following granularity: 4, 8, 15, 22, and 29 per PCM.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 19
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 19
MS BTS MFS SGSN
Um Abis/Ater(mux) Gb
SNDCP
GSM RFGSM-RF
RLC
LLC
SNDCP
Application
IP
L2-GCHRelay
L1bis
L2-GCH
RLC
NS
LLC
MACBSSGP
MAC
L1-GCH L1-GCH L1bis
NS
BSSGP
Relay
2 Alcatel-Lucent GPRS Architecture
Transmission Plane
For the exact purposes of the tracing, please refer to “Introduction to GPRS & E-GPRS Quality of Service
Monitoring”.
It can be said from this protocol stacks diagram that after allocation of a GCH by the BSC to the MFS, the
data carried over the GCH are transparent for the BSC.
The RLC function defines the procedures for segmentation and reassembly of LLC PDUs into RLC/MAC
blocks and, in RLC acknowledged mode of operation, for the Backward Error Correction (BEC) procedures
enabling the selective retransmission of unsuccessfully delivered RLC/MAC blocks. In RLC acknowledged
mode of operation, the RLC function preserves the order of higher layer PDUs provided to it.
The RLC function also provides link adaptation.
In EGPRS, in RLC acknowledged mode of operation, the RLC function may provide Incremental
Redundancy (IR).
The MAC function defines the procedures that enabled multiple mobile stations to share a common
transmission medium, which may consist of several physical channels. The function may allow a mobile
station to use several physical channels in parallel, i.e., use several time slots within the TDMA frame.
For the mobile station originating access, the MAC function provides the procedures, including the
contention resolution procedures, for the arbitration between multiple mobile stations simultaneously
attempting to access the shared transmission medium.
For the mobile station terminating access, the MAC function provides the procedures to queue and
schedule access attempts.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 20
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 20
2 Alcatel-Lucent GPRS Architecture
Signaling Plane
MS BTS BSC
Um Abis Ater
GSM RFGSM-RF
LLC
GMM/SM
L2-RSLRelay
L1-RSL L1-GSL
L2-GSL
BSCGP
RR/RRM
L2-RSL
L1-RSL
Relay
MFS
RR
Gb
L1bis
NSL2-GSL
RLC
BSCGP
L1-GSL
RRMRelay
BSSGP
GTTP RR/GTTP
B10
GTTP: GPRS Transparent Transport Protocol:
� MS-BSS protocol
� Allows GMM signaling between MS and SGSN, without TBF establishment
� With GTTP, GMM messages are conveyed on main DCCH between MS and BSC, and on BSCGP between
BSC and MFS.
� GTTP possible only if :
� DTM capable MS in dedicated mode (but not in DTM)
� DTM enabled in the cell
� Signalling LLC PDU to be exchanged (Tbit set to “signaling”)
� LLC PDU length does not exceed MAX_LAPDm x (length of a LAPDm frame)
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 21
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 21
3 Main Transactions
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 22
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 22
3 Main Transactions
Session Management: Attach Procedure
� Aim: to access GPRS services, the MS must first make its presence known to the network by performing a “GPRS attach” procedure with the SGSN
� Results:
� a logical link between the MS and the SGSN is created
� the MS is in Standby state and may activate a PDP context
� the MS location is known (RA accuracy)
� the MS is available for PS paging via the SGSN
� A combined GPRS and IMSI attach is possible for class A/B MS
Each signaling procedure taking place between the MS and the GSS involves UL and DL TBFs. Each
GMM/SM message triggers the establishment of a TBF. The complete attachment procedure in GPRS may
involve up to 7 TBFs (4 UL and 3 DL).
These TBFs are usually short (a few RLC blocks), thus the optimization of the TBF establishment time is
very important, as well as the TBF establishment success rate.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 23
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 23
3 Main Transactions
Session Management: PDP Context Activation
� Aim:
� in order to send and receive GPRS data, the MS must activate the PDP address it wants to use
� Results:
� the MS is known in the corresponding GGSN (the GGSN knows the SGSN where the MS is located) and data transmission with external data network can begin
The PDP context activation procedure is fairly close to the call establishment of the GSM including the
CCCH and the SDCCH phases (between the Channel Request message of the MS on RACH to the Alert
message).
It is important to control the overall PDP context activation duration for a good overview of the GPRS
QoS as it involves MS, MFS, SGSN, GGSN. The duration is longer than the GSM call establishment.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 24
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 24
3 Main Transactions
Mobility Management: Definitions
� For GPRS, as paging is more frequent than in GSM, RAs have been defined smaller than Las.
� An RA is a subset of one and only one LA.
� The MS location in Standby state is known in the SGSN at the RA level.
� The MS is paged in its RA when MT traffic arrives at the SGSN.
� One RA is served by only one SGSN.
2 types of PCH/PPCH use shall be kept distinct for PS procedures:
� DL transfer establishment for MS in Ready State: mapping of the DL Immediate Assignment message
� DL transfer establishment for MS in Standby State (PS Paging Procedure): mapping of the Packet Paging
Request message
The first type will obviously be used quite often but does not affect the dimensioning of the RA (the
message is sent in one cell only). The second type of paging message is sent over the RA and will occur
more often that CS Paging as the transfer mode of most external servers is bursty, so the rate of arrival
of the PDU inside the SGSN is irregular. This is the reason why an RA shall be dimensioned smaller than
an LA if we want to achieve a battery use relative to GPRS Paging procedures equivalent to the GSM one.
For Mobility Management constraints in the CN, it is not recommended to split one RA over 2 LAs (the
routing information for a CN originated Paging Message being the BSC, a given BSC shall belong to a
unique LA as well as a unique RA).
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 25
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 25
3 Main Transactions
Mobility Management: MS States
"Idle"
GPRS Attach
Packet
Idle Mode
Packet
TransferMode
MS MM states
MS RR states
GPRS Detach
T_READY expiry PDU Transmission
"Ready"
"Standby"
Idle: the MS is not attached to the network: paging is not possible.
Standby:
� the MS is attached to the network: paging is possible.
� the MS location is known in the CN with the RA accuracy.
Ready:
� the MS location is known with the cell accuracy.
� timer T_READY keeps the MS in the Ready state just after data transfer.
Packet Idle Mode:
� no Temporary Block Flow exists. Upper layers can require the transfer of an LLC PDU which, implicitly, may trigger the
establishment of TBF and transition to packet transfer mode.
� the MS listens to the PBCCH and to the paging sub-channel for the paging group the MS belongs to in idle mode. If PCCCH is not
present in the cell, the mobile station listens to the BCCH and to the relevant paging sub-channels.
Packet Transfer Mode:
In packet transfer mode, the mobile station is allocated radio resource providing a Temporary Block Flow on one or more physical
channels. Continuous transfer of one or more LLC PDUs is possible. Concurrent TBFs may be established in opposite directions.
Transfer of LLC PDUs in RLC acknowledged or RLC unacknowledged mode is provided.
� When selecting a new cell, the mobile station leaves the packet transfer mode, enters the packet idle mode where it switches to
the new cell, reads the system information and may then resume to packet transfer mode in the new cell.
� The timers regulating the transition between states are SGSN timers, not tunable in the BSS.
Caution: Idle mode in GPRS and Idle mode in GSM are two different states.
� A GSM MS in Idle mode is attached to an MSC and can be paged.
� A GPRS MS in Idle mode is NOT attached to an SGSN, so it cannot be paged but can monitor the GPRS information broadcast in the
SI13 of the BCCH.
Standby is the closest GPRS MS state to Idle GSM.
The MS state in the SGSN shall be considered apart from the Packet Transfer Mode in the BSS:
� MS in Standby mode can be in Packet Transfer Mode.
� MS in Ready mode can be in Packet Idle Mode.
The detach procedure is usually triggered by the MS. Three other types of detach are triggered by the CN:
� HLR Detach,
� SGSN Detach upon SGSN overload,
� SGSN Detach upon timer.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 26
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 26
� Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) enables a user to run Circuit Switched (CS) and Packet Services (PS) services simultaneously.
B10
So how was your holiday?
Very nice i’m sending you some pictures
I got it! You were in Lannion with your parents?
Yes it was very nice
� Like a class A mobile, but without the need of a dual receiver.
� Particular interest on 2G/3G dual mode handsets, for 3G to 2G continuity of service purpose.
3 Main Transactions
Simultaneous CS and PS services: DTM
3 GPP:
� Feature part of Rel.99 specifications
� Optional for MS, BSS, CN
� Impacts on MS, BSS, MSC
� Improvements in Release 4, 6 and 7
B10 implementation aligned with Release 4 definition of the feature. Release 6 and 7 improvements not
implemented in B10.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 27
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 27
3 Main Transactions
Dual Transfer Mode Activation
� Activation
� The activation of the DTM is done by the cell parameter (optional):
� EN_DTM = enabled
� Defaut value = Disabled
� Activation is possible:
� In Evolium cells
� In cells with a minimum number of resources
� MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1 (at least 2 TSs are needed for DTM resource allocation)
� In non-extended cells (to simplify implementation)
� Gs interface is highly recommended (but not strictly mandatory) for paging coordination.
B10
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 28
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 28
Class A (DTM)Class B
Packet Transfer
Release Last TBF (1)
Idle/Packet Idle
Dedicated
Cs Setup (2)
Dual Transfer
Packet
Request (3)
Release Last TBF (6)
Packet Request(5)
Cs Release (7)
Cs and Ps Release (4)
Scenario 1
Scenario 2
Scenario 3
3 Main Transactions
DTM Principles B10
Note that the system does not support a transition directly between packet transfer mode an DTM in
either direction.
Scenario 1: Entering the DTM mode for a Ms already in Packet Transfer receiving a Cs call request
1. Release of the TBF.
2. CS establishment.
3. A new TBF is established, the Ms enters into the DTM mode.
Scenario 2: Releasing the CS connection in DTM
1. Both CS and PS services are released.
2. New TBF is re established in Packet Transfer mode by the MS or by the network.
Scenario 3: Releasing the PS connection in DTM, then releasing the CS connection
1. When the last TBF is released for an Ms in DTM, the CS call continues in dedicated mode.
2. After releasing the CS call, the MS enters the idle mode.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 29
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 29
3 Main Transactions
DTM Multi slot Classes B10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
UL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ttb Tra
DL
P T
P T
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
UL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ttb Tra
DL
P T
P T P
P: PDCH
T: TCH
P: PDCH
T: TCH
� Class 5 (2+2): 1 TCH + 1 PDCH
� Class 9 (3+2): 1 TCH + 2 PDCH
The usage of Extended Dynamic Allocation in UL together with DTM is only allowed in the case of a DTM
[E]GPRS multislot Class 11.
All the other configurations don’t need usage of the Extended Dynamic Allocation
Note: C means « configurations with contiguous TSs ».
Class 11 (2+3) with EDA: 1 TCH + 2 PDCH
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 30
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 30
3 Main Transactions
Mobility Management: MS Location Management
The MS enters a new
cell
New cell inside the current
RA
MS in Ready state
Cell update
New cell belongs to a new
RA
RA update
New cell belongs to a new LA
RA/LA update
Only in NMO I
When the MS is in Ready State, it performs a “Cell Update”.
� The MS sends any LLC frame in the new cell with its TLLI in the header.
� The Cell and RAC information is added by the BSSGP at the programming of the BSSGP frame.
RA Update:
� The MS sends an RA Update Request message containing the identity of the MS, the old RAI and the
Update Type. The update type is either enter a new RA or periodical RA update.
� The BSS adds the cell global Identity when transferring the message into a BSSGP frame towards the
SGSN.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 31
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 31
3 Main Transactions
Interactions Between the SGSN and the MSC/VLR
� The Gs interface between the MSC and the SGSN is needed
� Following actions are possible:
� IMSI attach/detach via the SGSN
� LA update via the SGSN
� CS paging via the SGSN
The Gs interface carries signaling between the P-VLR (SGSN) and the VLR (MSC). Whether Gs is provided
or not, it does NOT belong to the BSS release as it is a CN feature.
The presence of the Gs interface is given by the NMO information inside the SI13 and the CN feature in
the PSI1.
The Gs interface carries only MAP signaling between the P-VLR and the VLR of the MSC.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 32
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 32
3 Main Transactions
Network Mode of Operation
PCH PCH no Gs interfaceII
PCH NA no Gs interface
PCH PPCH no Gs interface
III
Packet idle mode
Packet transfer mode
Mode CS paging channel PS paging channel Remarks
PCH PCH Gs interface
PACCH NA Gs interface
I
Packet idle mode
Packet transfer mode
B10
NA Main DCCH Gs interface
NA NA Gs interface
Dedicated mode
Dual transfer mode
All the possible combinations with the MPDCH are:
� NMOIII,
� NMOI with MPDCH.
According to the NMO offered and the packet mode of the MS (Packet Transfer Mode or Packet Idle
Mode), the routing of the PS paging and the CS paging changes.
The NMO setting is done from the OMC-R via the NETWORK_OPERATION_MODE parameter.
In case of DTM activation, Gs interface is highly recommended (but not strictly mandatory) for paging
coordination.
When the DTM feature is enabled, and when NETWORK_OPERATION_MODE = NMO I, the BSS shall use the
following channels to page a DTM MS engaged in a CS or PS connection:
� The PACCH to page a DTM mobile for a CS connection if this mobile has already a PS connection
ongoing. In this case, the MS is in Packet Transfer Mode.
� The main DCCH (FACCH or SDCCH) to page a DTM mobile for a PS connection if this mobile has already
a CS connection on-going. In this case, the MS is in dedicated mode.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 33
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 33
3 Main Transactions
CS/PS Paging During a Packet Transfer/Call
� CS paging during packet transfer (class B MS):
� according to the GSM standard, a class B MS may or may not (implementation dependent) listen to the PCH channel during a packet transfer
� if the MS listens to the PCH channel:
� some RLC blocks are lost
� the MS receives all the CS paging messages
� the MS can start a CS call
� at the end of the call, the MS triggers an RA updating procedure
� Refer to Suspend/Resume for Class B MS
The Class A and Class C GPRS mobiles do not face these problems. The former is able to handle
simultaneously CS and PS traffic (no traffic disruption), whereas the latter is not reachable in one
domain while it is attached to the other domain.
The Class B situation is the most complex one and shall be considered since Class B GPRS mobiles are the
most popular for the manufacturers. It shall be remembered that the most important service in the GSM
network where GPRS is activated is the speech. Therefore, an MS shall be given the opportunity to listen
to any CS paging. It is then up to the operator and to the MS to decide whether or not the CS call shall be
answered.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 34
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 34
3 Main Transactions
CS/PS Paging During a Packet Transfer/Call [cont.]
� Suspend/Resume for Class B MS:
1. Suspend (TLLI, RAI)2 Suspend
6 Resume (TLLI, RAI, SRN)
5 Suspend Ack
8 Resume Ack
3 Suspend (TLLI, RAI, suspend cause)
7 Resume
11 Routing Area Update Request
10 Channel Release
9 Resume Ack
MS BSC MFS SGSN
4 Suspend Ack (TLLI, RAI, SRN)
End of on-going TBF
DL LLC PDUs are discarded
Normally, no more paging
messages sent by the SGSNEnd of the GSM call
The MS leaves the GSM dedicated mode
The MS listens to “Channel Release” message content
The MS enters in
GSM dedicated
Mode (Ongoing GPRStransfer or not)
Suspend Reference Number (SRN)
1) The GPRS suspension procedure is initiated by the MS by sending an RR Suspend (TLLI, RAI, suspension cause) message to the BSC.
2) The BSC sends a Suspend (TLLI, RAI, suspension cause) message to the MFS, via the GSL link. The BSC shall store TLLI and RAI in
order to be able to request the SGSN (via the MFS) to resume GPRS services when the MS leaves dedicated mode.
3) The MFS sends a Suspend (TLLI, RAI) message to the SGSN.
4) The MFS receives a Suspend Ack from the SGSN, in which there is a Suspend Reference Number which will have to be used in the
resume step.
5) The MFS sends a suspend acknowledgement to the BSC, with the Suspend Reference Number information.
6) The BSC determines that the circuit-switched radio channel shall be released (typically upon circuit-switched call completion). If
the BSC is able to request the SGSN to resume GPRS services (i.e., the suspend procedure succeeded and the BSC received the
Suspend Reference Number, no external handover has occurred), the BSC shall send a Resume (TLLI, RAI, Suspend Reference
Number) message to the MFS.
7) Upon receipt of a Resume message from the BSC, the MFS sends a Resume (TLLI, RAI, Suspend Reference Number) message to the
SGSN.
8) The MFS receives a Resume Ack from the SGSN.
9) Upon receipt of the Resume Ack from the SGSN, the MFS sends a Resume Ack message to the BSC.
10) The BSC sends an RR Channel Release (GPRS Resumption) message to the MS and deletes its suspend/resume context.
11) The MS resumes GPRS services by sending a Routing Area Update Request message in the following cases:
� reception of a Channel Release with GPRS Resumption = NOK
� reception of a Channel Release without GPRS Resumption IE
� T3240 expiry
Alcatel-Lucent BSS does not support the suspend/resume procedure in case of inter-BSC reselection. In this case, MS shall resume
the GPRS service by sending a Routing Area Update Request message to the SGSN.
When a mobile station operating in class B mode of operation suspends its GPRS activity during circuit-switched activities, RRM
forces the release of the on-going TBF(s). Once the TBF(s) has(ve) been released, the MS context is kept for T_MS_Context_Lifetime
seconds before being deleted.
T_MS_Context_Lifetime is an MFS parameter. The default value is 120s and it cannot be set at OMC-R level.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 35
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 35
3 Main Transactions
CS/PS Paging During a Packet Transfer/Call [cont.]
� The Suspend/Resume feature is used for a Class A DTM MS
in the following cases:
� When a Class A DTM MS is handed over to a cell not supporting DTM
� After the Handover procedure is completed, the MS sends a suspend message with the suspension cause “DTM not supported in the cell”
� When a GPRS attached MS is in a cell that does not support DTM and a Cs service is initiated
� After the CS access to the cell, the MS sends a suspend message with the suspension cause “DTM not supported in the cell”
B10
In case two, the GPRS suspension procedure is initiated by the mobile station by sending a GPRS suspend
message with the suspension cause set to “DTM not supported in the cell”. This can be done as early as
possible after access but shall be done afetr sending a CLASSMARK CHANGE message.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 36
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 36
3 Main Transactions
CS/PS Paging During a Packet Transfer/Call [cont.]
� CS paging during packet transfer (class B MS):
� if the MS does not listen to the PCH channel:
� CS paging messages are lost if the duration of the packet transfer is higher than the duration of the repetition of CS paging messages
� if Gs interface is available:
� CS paging messages are sent via the PACCH channel
� PS paging during a GSM call (class B MS):
� the MS does not receive PS paging messages
If CS paging repetitions are viewed as a GSM QoS problem, the situation shall be avoided.
A missed PS Paging during a CS call is less of a problem as the traffic in GPRS is under the influence of
the GSS capacity to store the PDU originated from an external Packet Data Network. When the delay of
transfer is not a requirement for the service, there is no direct impact of a missed MS Paging.
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 37
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 37
3 Main Transactions
PS Paging for DTM MS in dedicated mode [cont.]
� PS paging during packet transfer (class A DTM MS):
B10
MS BSC MFS SGSN
MS in dedicated mode
PS PAGING
DTM Packet notification
DTM Packet notification
Ack
Packet notification
GPRS Information[UL LLC PDU]
DTM GPRS Information[UL LLC PDU]
UL LLC PDU
Start T_Wait_DTM
Stop T_Wait_DTM
Signalling carried on GTTP if possible
(1)
(2)
(3)(4)
(5)
(6)
1. The DTM MS is in dedicated mode.
2. As the MS is in GMM Standby state, the SGSN shall first page the MS before sending Data.
3. Upon receipt of the PS paging, the MFS checks wether the concerned MS is in dedicated mode. If it is
the case, the MFS sends to the BSC a BSCGP DTM Packet notification message providing the BSC with
the reference of the MS (i.e. IMSI and BSC reference) and the contents of the 44.018 Packet
Notification message and starts T_Wait_DTM, to monitor the reception of acknowledgement from BSC.
The BSC forwards the Packet Notification message to the MS on the main DCCH, and sends a DTM
Packet Notification Ack message to the MFS. The MFS stops T_Wait_DTM and delete the paging (paging
is considered as being successfully sent to the MS).
4.to 6. On receipt of the Packet Notification message, the MS shall answer to the notification with a cell
update procedure, I.e. by sending an LLC Frame.
� If the LLC frame does not convey user data information and can be transmitted through Gprs
Transparent Transport Protocol (GTTP) in less than MAX_LAPDm frames, the MS uses the GTTP
to send the UL LLC frame to the the SGSN.
� Otherwise the MS requests the establishment of an UL TBF with a 44.018 DTM request
message and sends the UL LLC PDU on the established UL TBF
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 38
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 38
B103 Main Transactions
Support of GTTP [cont.]
� GTTP allows GMM signaling between MS and SGSN, without TBF establishment
� With GTTP, GMM messages are conveyed on main DCCH between MS and BSC, and on BSCGP between BSC and MFS.
� GTTP is possible if:
� DTM capable MS in dedicated mode (but not in DTM)
� DTM enabled in the cell
� Signaling LLC PDU to be exchanged (i.e. “RA update”)
� LLC PDU length does not exceed MAX_LAPDm x (length of a LAPDm frame)
� Description of the GTTP:
While in dedicated mode or in DTM, upper layers in the mobile station or in the BSS may request the
transport of GPRS information transparently over the radio interface.
This procedure is possible only if:
� the information from upper layers is signalling information
� the GTTP length of the message is below the maximum indicated by the network, iI.e. it can fit in less
than MAX_LAPDm frames.
In other case, the MS or the BSS shall initiate the establishment of a TBF (I.e. enter DTM mode).
The information from upper layers shall be carried inside the GTTP Information message. The GTTP
Information message contains:
� TLLI of the MS
� LLC PDU
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 39
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 39
3 Main Transactions
TBF Establishments
Data Transfer establishment
UL TBF establishment DL TBF establishment
MS in PIM MS in PTM MS in PIMMS in PTM
MS in MM Ready state MS in MM Standby stateMS in MM Ready state
UL TBF running
DL TBF running
T3192 running
PS Paging
on CCCH
2-Phase
1-Phase
on CCCH
Non-DRX
DRX
There are 3 types of UL TBF establishment:
1. 1-Phase access on CCCH when the MS is in Packet Idle Mode and the MS does not need more than 1
PDCH and wants to transfer blocks in RLC acknowledged mode.
2. 2-Phase access on CCCH: when the MS is in Packet Idle Mode and the MS needs more than 1 PDCH or
wants to transfer blocks in RLC unacknowledged mode.
3. During a DL TBF: when the MS is in Packet Transfer Mode in the DL.
There are 4 types of DL TBF establishment:
1. DRX mode on CCCH: when the MS is in Packet Idle Mode and the MS is listening to all PCH channels of
its CS paging group.
2. Non-DRX mode on CCCH: when the MS is in Packet Idle Mode and the MS is listening to all AGCH
channels.
3. During a UL TBF: when the MS is in Packet Transfer Mode in the UL.
4. When T3192 is running: when a DL TBF has been released at the MS side and before the previously
used radio resources are released (at T3192 expiry).
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 40
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 40
Self-assessment on the Objectives
� Please be reminded to fill in the formSelf-Assessment on the Objectivesfor this module
� The form can be found in the first partof this course documentation
Section 1 � Module 1 � Page 41
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10863AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Principles
1 � 1 � 41
End of ModulePrinciples
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 1
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Do not delete this graphic elements in here:
1�2All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
Module 2Radio Resource management
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Section 1Radio Algorithms
EVOLIUME-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10
3FL11830ACAAWBZZA2 Issue 02
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 2
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 2
Blank Page
This page is left blank intentionally
First editionLast name, first nameYYYY-MM-DD01
RemarksAuthorDateEdition
Document History
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 3
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 3
Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
� Describe the algorithms of Resource Management and the related parameters
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 4
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 4
Module Objectives [cont.]
This page is left blank intentionally
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 5
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 5
Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!Page
1 (E)GPRS Channels 72 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation 223 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation 574 TBF Release Routine 78
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 6
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 6
Table of Contents [cont.]
Switch to notes view!Page
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 7
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 7
1 (E)GPRS Channels
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 8
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 8
1 (E)GPRS Channels
Overview
PDCH Slave PDCH
PTCCH
PDTCH
PACCH
PTCH
physical channel
control channel
traffic channel
signaling associated control channel
logical channel category
logical channel
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 9
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 9
1 (E)GPRS Channels
GPRS Physical Channel, PDCH
0 7 0 7 0 7
1 TDMA frame = 4.615 ms
0 1 2 49 50 51
The 52-multiframe= 240 ms
X X Block
Frame0 4 8 1213 17 21 25 26 30 34 3839 43 47 51
PTCCH
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B9 B10 B11B6 B7 B8
� Packet Data Channel (PDCH): a physical channel which carries GPRS logical channels
PDCH frame:
� Made up of 52 TSs of the same rank belonging to 52 consecutive TDMA frames.
� The 52 TSs are divided into blocks of 4 consecutive TSs.
� 12 blocks are created and 4 single TSs:
� TS12 and TS38 for the Timing Advance,
� TS25 and TS51 are pseudo Idle TS for transmission purposes (synchronization with the occurrences of
SACCH on the GSM 26-multiframe).
According to the PDCH design, a maximum of 8 PDCHs can be created with one TRX.
A PDCH can be entirely allocated to a single user, which is close to the principle of circuit in GSM.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 10
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 10
1 (E)GPRS Channels
GPRS Physical Channel, PDCH [cont.]
� 1 RLC PDU uses 1 PDCH block
� Except in MCS-7 to MCS-9 where 2 RLC PDUs use 1 PDCH block
� 2 kinds of physical channel PDCH
� master PDCH (MPDCH)
� A PDCH which carries the PCCCH and PBCCH logical channels
� For signaling purpose
� slave PDCH (SPDCH)
� A PDCH which carries PTCH logical channels
� For traffic purpose
The MPDCH has been introduced with the B7 release (details are given in the annex).
The use of GSM CCCH for the GPRS traffic offer can lead to QoS problem in GSM (PCH use more specifically).
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 11
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 11
1 (E)GPRS Channels
(E)GPRS Logical Channels
� Different GPRS logical channels mapped on PDCH, which are shared on a block basis:
� PTCH: PDTCH and PACCH
� Packet Timing advance Control Channel (PTCCH)
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 12
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 12
1 (E)GPRS Channels
(E)GPRS Logical Channels [cont.]
� Packet Traffic Channel (PTCH):
� used for user data and associated signaling transmission
� Packet Data Traffic Channel (PDTCH):
� unidirectional channel used for user data transmission
� mapped on one PDCH
� up to 8 PDTCHs may be allocated to an MS on different PDCHs with the same frequency parameters
Issue: the network shall control the multiplexing of several users on a unique UL PDCH avoiding collision
occurrence. This is achieved by the RLC/MAC functions and the use of USF, RRBP and TFI fields of the
RLC/MAC header.
The number of PDTCHs allocated to one MS belongs to:
� The MS capabilities (multislot class),
� The traffic in the BSS,
� Operator configuration of the BSS parameters.
NB: max number of PDTCHs to one MS = 8 because the MS has to be allocated TSs on a unique TRX, and one
TRX can support 8 PDCHs max.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 13
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 13
1 (E)GPRS Channels
(E)GPRS Logical Channels [cont.]
� Packet Traffic Channel (PTCH):
� Packet Associated Control Channel (PACCH):
� A bidirectional channel used to transmit control and acknowledgement messages
� Mapped on one PDCH:� if a single PDTCH is allocated to an MS, the PACCH is allocated on the PDCH carrying the PDTCH
� if multiple PDTCHs are allocated to an MS, the PACCH is allocated on one of the PDCH carrying the PDTCHs (Alcatel BSS)
Caution: PACCH blocks are used to carry the BSS signaling but not the GSS signaling.
The scheduling of PACCH blocks in the UL and the DL is monitored by the MFS. The most frequent use of the
PACCH blocks is for “Packet Ack/Nack” messages.
It can be used as well for CS Paging message when Master Channels are not available.
It is necessary for the MS to update the PSI13 on a regular basis in order to achieve proper RLSs and Power
Control mechanisms. The PSI13 content can be sent to the MS in Packet Transfer Mode via a PACCH.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 14
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 14
1 (E)GPRS Channels
(E)GPRS Logical Channels [cont.]
� Packet Timing advance Control Channel (PTCCH):
� bidirectional channel (DL: TA messages; UL: Access Burst for TA calculation) used by the continuous timing advance mechanism
� the PTCCH of one MS is carried by the PDCH carrying the PACCH
� Timing Advance Index (TAI), used for the scheduling of the AB, is part of the radio resources allocated to an MS.
� The TAI is a PDCH parameter
� The TAI takes 16 values
MFS
Access
Burst
TA Mes
sage
The Access Burst in the UL and the Timing Advance Messages in the DL are scheduled in time manner on
TS12 and TS38.
The TAI is part of the GPRS radio resources allocated by the MFS to the MS. Each mobile needs to have a
TAI.
The TAI range value is a limitation to MS multiplexing on a same TS, as both MS in the UL transfer and MS in
the DL transfer send their AB in the UL and receive their TA value in the DL.
16 values for TAI means that each MS sends an AB every 1.96 s, when the content of the TA Messages is
updated every 480 ms (every 4 occurrences of TAM).
IdemTAM 112N+24
idemTAM 438N+715
………………
TAM 038N+13
TAM 012N+12
TAM 038N1 4 repetitions of the 16 TA values (4 TA values updated)
TAM 012N0
TA MessageOn PTCCH TS
numberA.B. scheduled for
MF-51TAI value
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 15
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 15
1 (E)GPRS Channels
Multiplexing of (E)GPRS Logical Channels
� Temporary Block Flow (TBF): a unidirectional flow of data between the MS and the MFS for the transfer of one or more LLC PDUs (refer to GSM 04.60)
� Several TBFs can be transmitted on one PDCH (TFI 5)
�One TBF can be served on several PDCHs (TFI 17 & 24)
� A TBF is identified by a Temporary Flow Identity (TFI)
PDCH 1
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
PDCH 2
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
PDCH 3
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
TBF with TFI = 5 TBF with TFI = 17 TBF with TFI = 24
Temporary Flow Identity (TFI): Each TBF is assigned a TFI by the MFS.
Important: It is possible to establish 32 TBFs per TRX.
TBF: a group of blocks dynamically allocated to one MS for one transfer of RLC blocks in one direction inside
one cell.
A Temporary Block Flow is a temporary, unidirectional physical connection across the Um interface,
between one mobile and the BSS. The TBF is established when data units are to be transmitted across the
Um interface and is released as soon as the transmission is completed.
There is still a 3 RTS shift between Rx and Tx, on the TDMA frame.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 16
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 16
� Downlink PDTCH and PACCH blocks multiplexing
� Uplink PDTCH and PACCH for a UL TBF multiplexing
1 (E)GPRS Channels
Multiplexing of (E)GPRS Logical Channels [cont.]
PDTCH
TFI24
USF = 5
PDTCH
TFI17
PACCH
TFI24
TFI UL
PDTCH/
PACCH
+1
DL PDCH N°2
UL PDCH N°2
Downlink PDTCH and PACCH blocks multiplexing:
� The multiplexing of the different MSs is performed thanks to the TFI which is present in the RLC block
header.
� An MS decodes all the blocks of all its allocated PDCHs and keeps the blocks carrying its TFI in the RLC
header.
Uplink PDTCH and PACCH for a UL TBF:
� At UL TBF establishment, an MS receives a USF (Uplink State Flag, 8 values, MAC header) per allocated
PDCH.
� If the MS receives its USF on the downlink block n of PDCH i, it can transmit in uplink using the block n+1
of PDCH i.
� This is the principle of the Dynamic Allocation, which allows a maximum of two TSs in Uplink
NB: the values of the USF are entirely dedicated to PDTCH and PACCH transfers. See further (MPDCH and
RRBP)
The TFI is used in the UL as well: each mobile shall put its TFI in the UL header of the UL blocks during a UL
TBF, as well as in the RLC header of the UL PACCH blocks of a DL TBF.
So we can say that the de-multiplexing of the blocks is achieved by the use of a TFI.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 17
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 17
1 (E)GPRS Channels
Multiplexing of (E)GPRS Logical Channels [cont.]
� Uplink PACCH for a DL TBF scheduling:
S/P
≠≠ ≠≠false
PDTCH
TFI24
Packet DL
Ack/NAckmessage
PACCH
TFI24
USF =
000
PACCH
TFIXX
USF = 5
PDTCH
TFI17
RRBP = +3
Ø
TFI UL
PDTCH/
PACCH
DL PDCH N°2
UL PDCH N°2Exercise
RRBP: Relative Radio Block Period
Allocation of a PACCH block for the sending of acknowledgements in the UL of blocks received in the DL:
� The MS has no USF because it is involved in a DL TBF
� Use of the RRBP field transmitted in the downlink (MAC header) in association with the TFI of the DL TBF
in the RLC header.
� At the exact occurrence of the RRBP, a special USF value is used for the UL TBF taking place on the same
PDCH: USF=no emission.
It is a semi-boolean parameter. The RRBP field of an RLC/LAC block is checked each time by the MS whose
TFI is written in the RLC header.
� When S/P is false, no UL PACCH is scheduled.
� When the RRBP field is valid, the value gives the number of blocks to wait before sending its PACCH block
in the UL.
S/P is false means the MS has to send an acknowledgement message to the MFS.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 18
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 18
1 (E)GPRS Channels
Extended Dynamic Allocation B10
� EDA allows higher throughput in uplink through the support of more than two TSs
� Principles
� Same basic principles as Dynamic Allocation (i.e. based on USF)
� Differences
� A mobile station detecting its assigned USF value on one assigned PDCH is allowed to transmit on that PDCH and all higher numbered assigned PDCHs
� The mobile station needs not to monitor all the downlink PDCH corresponding to its uplink PDCH allocated
B10 MR2
The EDA feature is optional for the network.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 19
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 19
1 (E)GPRS Channels
Extended Dynamic Allocation [cont.] B10
� USF scheduling for
EDA mode:
DL TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
BP n
UL
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
DL TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
BP n+1
UL
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
DL TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
BP n+2
UL
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
DL TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
BP n+3
UL
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
DL TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
BP n+4
UL
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
DL TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
BP n+5
UL
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 20
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 20
1 (E)GPRS Channels
Extended Dynamic Allocation Usage [cont.] B10
� Uplink Throughput increase:
� Class 11 (2+3):
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
UL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ttb Tra
DL
Tx Tx Tx
Rx Rx Mx
� Class 12 (1+4):
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
UL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Tta Trb
DL
Tx Tx Tx
Mx
x Rx
Tx
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 21
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 21
1 (E)GPRS Channels
Extended Dynamic Allocation Usage [cont.] B10
� EN_EDA: disabled (default Alcatel value).
� Changeable at OMC-R on Cell level
� EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL: activation level
� Gives an artificial mean to limit the activation domain (inter-operabilityissues)
� Possibility is given by the parameter ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATIONto allow DTM and EDA combination
� (i.e. support of 2+3 configuration for DTM multislot class 11)
EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL and ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION are relevant if EN_EDA = 1.
EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL=0 (Alcatel default value) and it can be set at the OMC-R (BSS Level)
ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION = 0 (Alcatel default value) and it can be set at the OMC-R ( BSS Level)
Note : none of the combination of the three paramters allows activating EDA only in case of DTM operations
The Ms is supporting EDA mode depending on the following PCC flag:
EDA_Allowed_GPRS (respectively EDA_Allowed_EGRPS) which is set to true if:
� The cell belongs to an Evolium BTS
� The cell is not an extend cell
� EN_EDA parameter is activated
� EDA is supported by the MS in GPRS (respectively EGPRS)
� EDA is enabled in the BSS ( EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL parameter)
� The N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA last observed biases since the transfer start are uplink
� There is no RT PFC associated to the MS
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 22
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 22
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 23
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 23
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Definitions: SPDCH Group
� SPDCH group = time slots usable for PS traffic
� Only 1 SPDCH group per TRX
� contains TS
� belonging to the same TRX
� having the same frequency configuration
� without hole
� MPDCHs are not part of the SPDCH group
� Up to 16 PDCH groups per cell
� A TRX is PS/CS capable only if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0
� TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 then the TRX is only CS capable
Any TRX should possibly support one SPDCH group except for one case: Concentric cell or multi-band cell
design, an SPDCH group can NOT belong to the inner zone.
An SPDCH group can be supported by both hopping and non-hopping TRXs.
Only one Mobile Allocation (MA) is supported in a cell.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 24
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 24
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Definitions: SPDCH Group [cont.]
� Example: BBH is used, NB_TS_MPDCH=0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TRX1
TRX2
TRX3
BCCH SDCCH
SDCCH
TRX4
TRX_PREF_MARK
0
1
0
1
SPDCH group1
SPDCH group2
SPDCH group3
SPDCH group4
SPDCH group2 Null
SPDCH group4 Null
CAUTION: animated slide.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 25
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 25
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Definitions: 8-PSK High Power Capability
� GMSK
� constant envelope(amplitude) modulation
� one bit per modulated symbol over the radio path
� 8-PSK
� Envelope modulation not constant
� 3 bits per modulated symbol over the radio path dB
(147 bits)
PN
0
-20
dB
t
(147 bits)
542.8 µs
PN
dB
t
(147 bits)
542.8 µs
PN
Q
I
1,1,1
0,1,1
0,1,0
0,0,0
0,0,1
1,0,1
1,0,0
1,1,0
GMSK = the Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying belongs to a subset of phase modulations
8-PSK = 8-state Phase Shift Keying
� 8-PSK is not a constant envelope modulation. Part of the information is conveyed by the amplitude of the carrier
which varies over time.
� An 8-PSK signal carries three bits per modulated symbol over the radio path, which allows to triple the data
transmission rates.
Modulation Gross Bit Rate
� The normal burst is divided into 156.25 symbol periods. A normal burst has a duration of 3/5.2 seconds (577 µs).
(3GPP TS 05.02).
� For GMSK modulation, a symbol is equivalent to a bit (3GPP TS 05.04).
� A GMSK burst is composed of 156.25 bits (6 tail bits + 26 training sequence bits + 116 encrypted bits + 8.25 guard
period (bits)).
� Modulation gross bit rate = (156.25 bits) / (3/5.2 seconds) = 270 Kbit/s
� For 8-PSK modulation, one symbol corresponds to three bits (3GPP TS 05.04).
� An 8-PSK burst is composed of 156.25 x 3 = 468.75 bits (18 tail bits + 78 training sequence bits + 348 encrypted
bits + 24.75 guard period (bits)).
� Modulation gross bit rate = (468.75 bits) / (3/5.2 seconds) = 810 Kbit/s.
Amplitude variesconstantCarrier envelope
EGPRSGPRS / EGPRSPacket radio service
810 Kbit/s270 Kbit/sGross bit rate per carrier
200 KHz200 KHzChannel spacing
Phase modulationFrequency modulationModulation type
8-PSKGMSK
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 26
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 26
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Definitions: 8-PSK High Power Capability [cont.]
�G4 TRE characteristics
30 W
44,77 dBm
25 W
43,98 dBm
30 W
44,77 dBm
12 W
40,79 dBm
30 W
44,77 dBm
25 W
43,98 dBm
30 W
44,77 dBm
15 W
41,76 dBm
8-PSK output power
60 W
47,78 dBm
35 W
45,44 dBm
60 W
47,78 dBm
45 W
46,53 dBm
GMSK output power
1800900Frequency
band
High powerMedium powerHigh powerMedium powerType
TADHE
EDGE+
TADHTRADE
EDGE+
TRADTAGHE
EDGE+
TAGHTRAGE
EDGE+
TRAG
G3 TREs are not able to handle the 8-PSK modulation. Only G4 TREs (also called TRA) are EDGE capable.
The TRA sensitivity is as follows:
� GMSK: - 111 dBm.
� 8-PSK: - 108 dBm for MCS5, - 99 dBm for MCS9.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 27
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 27
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Definitions: 8-PSK High Power Capability [cont.]
� The GMSK output power is:
� The minimum value among the maximum TRE output power in:
� One cell
� One frequency band
� The maximum output power in the cell
� The 8-PSK output power
� Is given for one TRE by the modulation_delta_power
� = [Maximum output power in the cell] – [8-PSK TRE output power]
� And a possible attenuation, in order not to exceed the GMSK power in the cell (case of BS_TXPWR_MAX <> 0 dB)
� 8-PSK High Power Capability
� G4 HP TRE if the modulation_delta_power < 3dB
� G4 MP TRE if the modulation_delta_power > 3dB
� The 8-PSK High Power Capability is used in the TRX ranking process
CAUTION: do not confuse “MP” and “HP” given as a TRE hardware characteristic and “MP” and “HP”
defined by the 8-PSK High Power Capability.
� The first ones represent the maximum power a TRE can transmit (in GMSK or 8-PSK).
� The second ones represent the capability of a TRE to emit with an 8-PSK power close to the maximum
GMSK power in a given cell.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 28
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 28
� Input / Output
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Definitions: TRX Ranking
TRX Ranking
function
8-PSK High Power Capability (G4 HP, G4 MP, or G3)
TRX Ranking Table
DR TRE capability (FR or DR)
Inputs Outputs
TRX_PREF_MARK
PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX
Radio cell configuration (nb of SPDCHs per TRX)
TRX id (0,1,…,14, or 15)
TRE
Characteristics
TRX or cell
Characteristics
TRX Rank
E-GSM, P-GSM, GSM850 or DCS TRX
Once the TRXs are mapped to the TREs (after a possible TRX adjustment), the TRX Ranking function is
computed. This function consists in ranking the TRXs in order to ensure that the CS and PS allocations will
be consistent.
HP means there is less than 3 dB of difference between the maximum power of the GMSK TRXs and the
maximum power of the 8-PSK TRXs in the cell. On the contrary, MP means the difference is more than 3 dB.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 29
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 29
� Ranking criteria (from the highest preference for PS allocation to the lowest)
� Concerns only PS capable TRX: TRX_PREF_MARK = 0
� PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX
� = 0 (no specific preference) then the BCCH TRX is managed as a non-BCCH TRX
� = 1 then the BCCH TRX has the highest preference
� = 2 then the BCCH TRX has the lowest preference (B9 MR4)
� HW TRE capability: G4 HP > G4 MP > G3
� DR TRE capability: FR > DR
� E-GSM TRX preference: E-GSM TRXs > P-GSM/GSM850/DCS TRXs
� TRX(s) having the maximum SPDCH group size
� TRX having the lowest TRX index
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Definitions: TRX Ranking [cont.]
Exercise
The TRX with the lowest Rank value has the highest preference for PS allocations.
Step 01: Separation of non-PS and PS capable TRXs
The first step consists in removing the non-PS capable TRXs, i.e., the TRXs having a non-null TRX_PREF_MARK. Only the PS capable
TRXs are then kept for the TRX ranking.
Step 02: Ranking of the PS capable TRXs
� First criterion: PS allocations preferred on the BCCH TRX
� If the BCCH TRX is a PS capable TRX and the parameter PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX is set to ‘2’, then the BCCH TRX has the highest
rank in the TRX Ranking Table. This means that this TRX is selected last for PS allocations.
� If the BCCH TRX is a PS capable TRX and the parameter PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX is set to ‘1’, then the BCCH TRX has the lowest
rank (i.e., Rank 1) in the TRX Ranking Table. This means that this TRX is selected first for PS allocations.
� If the parameter PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX is set to ‘0’, then the rank of the BCCH TRX is determined by the remaining criteria.
� Second criterion: HW TRE capability
� The TRXs mapped on a G4HP TRE are ranked first, then they are followed by the TRXs mapped on a G4MP TRE, finally by the
TRXs mapped on a G3 TRE.
� Third criterion: DR TRE capability
� Among the TRXs having the same HW TRE capability, select first the FR TRX, then the DR TRX.
� Fourth criterion:E-GSM TRX preference
� Among the TRXs having the same HW TRE capability and the same DR TRE capability, select first the E-GSM TRXs, then the P-
GSM/GSM850/DCS TRXs.
� Fifth criterion: Maximum SPDCH group criterion
� Among the TRX having the same HW TRE capability, the same DR TRE capability and the same E-GSM TRX preference, rank first
the TRX having the maximum number of consecutive SPDCHs per TRX. Note that this is a static information given by the O&M
configuration of the TRX.
� Sixth criterion: TRX identity
� Among the remaining TRXs, select first the TRX having the lowest TRX id. This criterion aims at having a deterministic criterion
at the end of the TRX Ranking function.
Note:
The TRX ranking function does not take into account the current traffic load.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 30
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 30
� Allocated PDCH: MIN_PDCH = 1
� Established TRX: MIN_PDCH = 1 and EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
BSS Resources Reservation
MFSBSC
PDCH
BTS
Air
MFSBSC
M-EGCHPDCH M-EGCH
BTS
Air Abis AterMuxTRX
The 3 following states are handled, for a PDCH:
� allocated TS: timeslots allocated to the MFS.
� not-allocated TS: timeslots allocated to the BSC
� de-allocating TS: transitory state, TS allocated to the MFS but must be given back to the BSC
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 31
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 31
� If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled
� 1 PDCH is always available for (E)GPRS traffic
� This PDCH is located
� on an established TRX
� with at least N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS (=1) GCHs allocated on this TRX
� Mandatory rule:
� MIN_PDCH ≥ NB_TS_MPDCH + 1
� Since MIN_PDCH is the number of master and slave PDCHs that are permanently allocated
� Otherwise, the rule is MIN_PDCH ≥ NB_TS_MPDCH
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Fast Initial PS Access
The “first TRX of the cell having some allocated RTSs” is identified thanks to the latest RR Allocation
Indication message received from the BSC. When considering the sorted TRX list in the latest RR Allocation
Indication message, it is the TRX supporting the first RTS allocated to the MFS, according to the
SPDCHs_Allocation bitmap.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 32
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 32
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Principle
� The BSC indicates regularly to the MFS in the RR Allocation Indicationmessage:
� The number of TSs allocated for PS traffic
� MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
� The location of those SPDCHs on the PS capable TRXs
� Using the SPDCHs_Allocation bitmap
� The MFS sends to the BSC the RR Usage Indication message to:
� Confirm the allocated / de-allocated TSs to the BSC (Acknowledgement)
� Indicate the PS usage state of those TSs
� This message is sent:
� Periodically
� After the reception of the RR allocation Indication from the BSC
All the usable PS capable radio time slots are explicitly allocated to the MFS through the “RR Allocation
Indication” message.
A coordination is performed between the MFS and the BSC to allocate radio time slots for the PS traffic.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 33
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 33
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Principle [cont.]
� MFS / BSC Synchronization
BSC MFS
RR Allocation Indication
RR Usage Indication
RR Usage Indication
TCH_INFO_PERIOD (5s)
TCH_INFO_PERIODRR Allocation Indication
RR Usage Indication
RR_ALLOC_PERIOD (2)
x
TCH_INFO_PERIOD
B10
The RR Allocation Indication message:
� Is sent from the BSC to the MFS to provide the MFS with the location of the allocated SPDCH.
� Is transmitted periodically every RR_ALLOC_PERIOD * TCH_INFO_PERIOD seconds = 2 * 5 seconds.
� Contains the SPDCH_Allocation bitmap which indicates whether available time slots in the cell are allocated or not to
the MFS.
The RR Usage Indication message:
� Is sent from the MFS to the BSC periodically (every TCH_INFO_PERIOD seconds) or in response to a “Radio Resource
Allocation Indication” message.
� Contains 4 bitmaps:
� The SPDCHs_Confirmation bitmap. The role of this bitmap is to indicate the status of each SPDCH from the point
of view of the MFS and also to acknowledge the allocation of SPDCH newly granted by the BSC and the
deallocation of SPDCH given back to the BSC. The value of each bit in the SPDCHs_Confirmation bitmap has the
following meaning:
� 1: this SPDCH is allocated to the MFS (SPDCH allocation state is “allocated” or “de-allocating”).
� 0: this SPDCH is not allocated to the MFS (SPDCH allocation state is “not allocated”).
� The SPDCHs_Usage bitmap:
� 1: this SPDCH is allocated to the MFS and “used” (one TBF, RT PFC or one UL block has some radio
resources allocated on it, and/or if its basic Abis nibble is being used by a GCH channel or is still switched
to an Ater nibble in the BSC).
� 0: this SPDCH is either allocated to the MFS and “unused” (*), or is not allocated to the MFS.
� The SPDCHs_RadioUsage bitmap:
� 1: this SPDCH is allocated to the MFS and there is at least one TBF allocated on it.
� 0: this SPDCH is either allocated to the MFS and there is no TBF allocated on it, or is not allocated to the
MFS.
� The SPDCHs_DTM_TCH_List bitmap:
� 1: this SPDCH is used as TCH for DTM.
� 0: this SPDCH is used as No TCH for DTM.
The bitmaps are present for all the available PS capable TRXs of a cell, even if no SPDCH is allocated to the MFS for a
given TRX.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 34
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 34
Computation of MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Functional Entities
AV_USED_CS_TS
AV_USED_PS_TS
AV_UNUSED_TS
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
CS/PS Margin
Load Evaluation
Thresholds computation
NB_TS
LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
THR_MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_CS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
NB_TS_DEFINED
NB_TS_SPDCH
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MAX_PDCH
MIN_PDCH
NB_TS_MPDCH
NB_USED_CS_TS
NB_USED_PS_TS
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MIN_SPDCH
MAX_SPDCH
B10
The BSC peridically computes the number of Slave PDCHs that it can provide to the MFS. This number of
SPDCHs is denoted MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT. In order to evaluate the value of this parameter, the BSC requires to
compute a certain number of other parameters.
This different steps to evaluate MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT are the following ones:
Computation of MIN_SPDCH, MAX_SPDCH and MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD from O&M parameters and from
NB_TS which has a changeable value (in case of TRX failure for example, seen later)
� Computation of MARGIN_PRIORITY_CS and of MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
� Computation of MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 35
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 35
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Thresholds Computation
Computation of MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
AV_USED_CS_TS
AV_USED_PS_TS
AV_UNUSED_TS
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
CS/PS Margin
Load Evaluation
Thresholds computation
NB_TS
LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
THR_MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_CS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
NB_TS_DEFINED
NB_TS_SPDCH
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MAX_PDCH
MIN_PDCH
NB_TS_MPDCH
NB_USED_CS_TS
NB_USED_PS_TS
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MIN_SPDCH
MAX_SPDCH
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 36
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 36
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Thresholds Computation [cont.]
� MAX_SPDCH = Roundup [Min(MAX_PDCH – NB_TS_MPDCH ; NB_TS_SPDCH) x Availability_TS_Ratio]
� MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD = Roundup [Min(MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD –NB_TS_MPDCH ; NB_TS_SPDCH) x Availability_TS_Ratio]
� MIN_SPDCH = Roundup [(MIN_PDCH – NB_TS_MPDCH) x Availability_TS_Ratio]
� Where Availability_TS_Ratio(k) = NB_TS(k) / NB_TS_DEFINED
� evaluated at instant tk, every RR_ALLOC_PERIOD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD (10s)
� NB_TS(k) takes into account the possible TRX failures
NB_TS_SPDCH is the total number of TCH/SPDCH time slots in the cell, without taking into account the
possible TRX failure. This parameter can be retrieved by the BSC from the O&M configuration of the cell.
NB_TS_DEFINED is the total number of pure TCH, TCH/SDCCH, or TCH/SPDCH time slots, without taking into
account the possible TRX failure. This parameter can be retrieved by the BSC from the O&M configuration
of the cell.
NB_TS is the total number of pure TCH, TCH/SDCCH, or TCH/SPDCH time slots (evaluated every 10s), taking
into account possible TRX failures.
A TCH/SPDCH is a TS which can be allocated for either CS traffic or PS traffic (i.e. mapped on a PS capable
TRX and inside the SPDCH group).
A pure TCH is a TS which can be allocated only for CS traffic (i.e. outside the SPDCH group).
A TCH/SDCCH is a dynamic SDCCH (can be allocated as either a TCH or an SDCCH).
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 37
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 37
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Load Evaluation
Computation of MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
AV_USED_CS_TS
AV_USED_PS_TS
AV_UNUSED_TS
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
CS/PS Margin
Load Evaluation
Thresholds computation
NB_TS
LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
THR_MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_CS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
NB_TS_DEFINED
NB_TS_SPDCH
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MAX_PDCH
MIN_PDCH
NB_TS_MPDCH
NB_USED_CS_TS
NB_USED_PS_TS
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MIN_SPDCH
MAX_SPDCH
B10
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 38
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 38
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Load Evaluation [cont.]
� The BSC computes 3 averaged values
� AV_USED_CS_TS(k), AV_USED_PS_TS(k) and AV_UNUSED_TS(k)
� For each cell
� At sampling instant tk, every RR_ALLOC_PERIOD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD (10s)
� Using a sliding window, LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
� Same formula for AV_USED_PS_TS(k) and AV_UNUSED_TS(k) based on NB_USED_PS_TS(k) and NB_UNUSED_TS(k)
� NB_UNUSED_TS(k) = NB_TS(k) – NB_USED_CS_TS(k) – MAX[MIN_SPDCH(k) ; NB_USED_PS_TS(k)]
∑1- RIOD_GPRSLOAD_EV_PE
0 =i
i)-(k _TSNB_USED_CS RIOD_GPRSLOAD_EV_PE
1 = _TS(k)AV_USED_CS
B10
NB_USED_CS_TS(k): number of available time slots handled by the BSC and carrying CS traffic in the cell at
sampling instant tk. A time slot is taken into account in the evaluation of NB_USED_CS_TS(k) if:
� SPDCH allocation state = not allocated,
� Occupancy state = used.
� SPDCH allocation state = allocated or de-allocating
� DTM mode = DTM TCH
NB_USED_PS_TS(k): number of available time slots used for PS traffic in the cell at sampling instant tk. A
time slot is taken into account in the evaluation of NB_USED_PS_TS(k) if:
� SPDCH allocation state = allocated or de-allocating,
� Occupancy state = used.
� DTM Mode = DTM TCH
These variables are updated every TCH_INFO_PERIOD (5s).
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 39
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 39
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
Load Evaluation [cont.]
TCH_INFO_PERIOD = 5s
AV_USED_CS_TS(k)
AV_USED_PS_TS(k)
AV_UNUSED_TS(k)
NB_USED_CS_TS(k)
NB_USED_PS_TS(k)
NB_USED_TS(k)
NB_UNUSED_TS(k)
kk-1k-2
LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS = 3
k+1 k+2
AV_USED_CS_TS(k+2)
AV_USED_PS_TS(k+2)
AV_UNUSED_TS(k+2)
RR_ALLOC_PERIOD * TCH_INFO_PERIOD
B10
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 40
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 40
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
CS/PS Margins
Computation of MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
AV_USED_CS_TS
AV_USED_PS_TS
AV_UNUSED_TS
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
CS/PS Margin
Load Evaluation
Thresholds computation
NB_TS
LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
THR_MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_CS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
NB_TS_DEFINED
NB_TS_SPDCH
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MAX_PDCH
MIN_PDCH
NB_TS_MPDCH
NB_USED_CS_TS
NB_USED_PS_TS
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MIN_SPDCH
MAX_SPDCH
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 41
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 41
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
CS/PS Margins [cont.]
�MARGIN_CS = MAX(MARGIN_PRIORITY_CS(k), AV_UNUSED_TS(k) / 2)
� Where:
� MARGIN_PRIORITY_CS = THR_MARGIN_PRIO_CS x (NB_TS –MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD)
� THR_MARGIN_PRIO_CS = 100% - HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
�MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS = THR_MARGIN_PRIO_PS x MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD
� Where:
� THR_MARGIN_PRIO_PS = 10%
� These 2 margins are used to ensure that a certain number of TSs is kept available for the arrival of new calls / transfers between 2 RR Allocation Indication messages
B10
These new margins, one for CS traffic and one for PS traffic are here introduced to guarantee that a certain
number of timeslots are kept available for the arrival of new calls between two transmissions of RR
Allocation Indication messages.
MARGIN_PRIORITY_CS : dedicated to CS traffic.
MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS : dedicated to PS traffic.
These margins are re-evaluated every RR_ALLOC_PERIOD * TCH_INFO_PERIOD, before the computation of
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 42
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 42
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT Computation
Computation of MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
AV_USED_CS_TS
AV_USED_PS_TS
AV_UNUSED_TS
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
CS/PS Margin
Load Evaluation
Thresholds computation
NB_TS
LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
THR_MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_CS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
NB_TS_DEFINED
NB_TS_SPDCH
MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MAX_PDCH
MIN_PDCH
NB_TS_MPDCH
NB_USED_CS_TS
NB_USED_PS_TS
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MIN_SPDCH
MAX_SPDCH
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 43
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 43
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT Computation: Functional Entities
MAX_SPDCH_LIMITComputation of MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
MIN_SPDCH
MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
Computation of
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_CS
Computation of
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_PS
AV_USED_CS_TS
AV_UNUSED_TS
AV_USED_PS_TS
MARGIN_PRIORITY_CS
MAX_SPDCH
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_CS
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_PS
The basic idea for the evaluation of MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT is to start from the number of unused time slots and
to share them between CS and PS traffic, taking into account 2 margins (one for CS, one for PS traffic)
defined to guarantee a certain number of time slots available to serve incoming calls/transfers.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 44
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 44
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT Computation: Formulas
�MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT is equal to:
� MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_CS under normal load
� MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_PS under high CS load
�MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_CS
� Represents the maximum number of SPDCHs that can be allocated to the MFS ensuring the CS allocation is not degraded
� = RoundDown[NB_TS – AV_USED_CS_TS – MARGIN_CS]
�MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_PS
� Represents the minimum number of SPDCHs that can be allocated to the MFS ensuring the PS allocation is not degraded
� = RoundUp[AV_USED_PS_TS + MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS]
OR
B10
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 45
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 45
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT Computation: Formulas [cont.]
� Choice between MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_CS and MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_PS
� If MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_CS >= MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD then
� MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT = Min[MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_CS ; MAX_SPDCH]
� Else
� If MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_CS > MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_PS then� MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT = Min[MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_CS ; MAX_SPDCH]
� Else � MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT = Min[MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_PS ; MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD]
�MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT is always between MIN_SPDCH and MAX_SPDCH
B10
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 46
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 46
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT Computation: Example
NB_TS=14 MAX_SPDCH=14 MIN_SPDCH=1
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD=2 HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS=80%
Exercise
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
High CS load
Without PS traffic
CS
Traffic
Normal
load
CS
Traffic
PS
Traffic
High PS
load
PS
Traffic
High CS load
with PS traffic
CS
Traffic
PS
Traffic
Case “Normal Load”: The capacity is shared between CS and PS taking into account the associated margins.
Case “High CS load”: When the CS traffic increases, MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT is reduced down to
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD to ensure a minimum capacity for the PS traffic.
Case “Very high CS load”: When the CS traffic increases and in the same time there is no PS traffic,
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT is decreased down to MIN_SPDCH to ensure the maximum capacity for the CS.
Case “High PS load”: MAX_SPDCH is not the only criterion taken into account to limit the PS capacity, the
CS_MARGIN is applied too.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 47
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 47
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
PS Zones: Definition
� MAX_SPDCH = 12, MIN_SPDCH = 1, MAX_SPDCH_LOAD = 8
� MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT = 7
TRX3 TRX1
BCCH SDCCHPS PS PS PS CS CS CS
Non pre-emptable zone
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone
PS traffic zone
B10
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone: this zone corresponds to the MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD consecutive PS capable time slots that are preferred for PS allocation. In this zone, allocated TBFs cannot be preempted. If
the value of MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD is not modified, this zone remains unchanged.
For a DTM request, the MFS will always allocate DTM TCH in this zone, and try to select the leftmost
timeslot as DTM TCH.
Non pre-emptable PS zone: this zone is always inside the MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone. In this latter zone, we search for the rightest time slot allocated to the MFS and used, or allocated to the MFS, not use, TCH
for DTM. Then, all time slots situated at its left define this non pre-emptable PS zone.
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone: this zone corresponds to the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT consecutive PS capable time slots that are preferred for PS allocation.
PS traffic zone: this zone corresponds to the larger zone between the non pre-emptable PS zone and the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 48
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 48
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
PS Zones: Selection of MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT TS
� The MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT timeslot are selected within:
� the non pre-emptable PS zone� It contains all the TS that can be or are allocated to the MFS
� the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone� If the number of selected TS is still lower than MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT, the process continues outside this zone until this number reaches MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT.
�Once MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT timeslot have been selected, the remaining TS are allocated to the BSC
� The TS carrying the TCH of a MS in DTM remains allocated to the MFS:
� Even if they are outside the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone
� It only concerns the TCH of the MS, not the TBF resources
B10
Caution: animated slide.
The BSC shall not de-allocate a DTM TCH timeslot carrying CS traffic, even if the DTM TCH is outside of
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD value and MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone (in case of TRX failure, the BSC will adjust
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD value, so it is possible the DTM TCH timeslot is outside of non-emptable zone) until
the DTM CS connection is released. When the DTM CS connection is released, the BSC notifies it to the MFS,
the MFS changes the DTM TCH timeslot from “TCH for DTM” to “no TCH for DTM” and indicates this
information to the BSC through the message RR Usage Indication, only then the BSC can de-allocate it.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 49
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 49
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
PS Zones: Impact on CS Call
� If EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO = enabled
� AND a CS call is inside both
� The Non pre-emptable zone and
� The MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_ZONE then
� An intra cell HO cause 30 is triggered
TRX1
CS CSBCCH SDCCHPS PS PS PS CS
HO cause 30
PS PS
TRX3
Non pre-emptable zone
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone
PS traffic zone
B10
Caution: animated slide.
The BSC shall not de-allocate a DTM TCH timeslot carrying CS traffic, even if the DTM TCH is outside of
MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD value and MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone.
Cause 30 is not applied in case of TS carrying a DTM TCH. SPDCH allocation state is equal to “TCH for DTM”
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 50
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 50
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
SPDCH Allocation: Conclusion
� Example of an SPDCHs_Allocation bitmap
� MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT = 7
TRX3 TRX1
BCCH SDCCHPS PS PS PS CS CS
Non pre-emptable zone
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone
1 1 1 0 1 1 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B10
CS*
DTM MS
CS* : DTM TCH
Caution: animated slide.
The algorithm of selection of MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT TCH/SPDCH time slots to allocate to the MFS and of
building of the SPDCHs_Allocation bitmap is performed as follows:
� Initialization:
� Definition of the non pre-emptable PS zone and of the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone,
� nb_selected = 0,
� Begin with the time slot having the lowest index and situated on the TRX having the lowest rank in the
TRX Ranking Table.
� Process on each TCH/SPDCH time slots available in the cell:
� First, begins with the non pre-emptable PS zone: analysis of all time slots within this zone. At the end
of this zone:
� If nb_selected >= MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT: stop the process and the remaining time slots are
allocated to the BSC,
� Otherwise: continue the process in the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone. At the end of this zone:
� If nb_selected = MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT: stop the process and the remaining time slots are
allocated to the BSC,
� Otherwise: continue the process outside the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone. When nb_selected =
MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT: stop the process and the remaining time slots are allocated to the BSC.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 51
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 51
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
SPDCH De-allocation: Principle
� A preemption is triggered in the MFS
� At the reception of an RR Allocation Indication message from the BSC
� In case there is one or several PDCH to give back to the BSC
� It concerns only used PDCHs where:� Its mapped basic Abis nibble is used in an M-EGCH link
� At least 1 TBF is allocated on it
� CS preemption takes place in two main steps:� Soft preemption
� Fast preemption
� SPDCH de-allocation is based on GCH inactivity timers
� Timers T_GCH_INACTIVITY and T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST are used to de-allocate the unused GCHs
OR
B10
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 52
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 52
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
SPDCH De-allocation: Preemption Mechanism
All T1 requests
played successfully
No TBF candidate for T1 or
T_PDCH_Preemption expiry
Fast preemption
Soft preemptionT1 re-allocation
Unlock PDCHs
Arrival of RR
Allocation
indication message
Lock PDCHsOn TRXs with all its basic Abis
nibbles impacted by CS
preemption
Step 1: lock the PDCHs of the TRXs which are highly impacted by the CS preemption
� This step is only applicable to Evolium BTSs
� The basic Abis nibbles of the time slots preempted by the BSC may be currently used by some GCHs in the cell. Thus, the TRXs
(or M-EGCHs) using these GCHs will be impacted by the preemption, even if the preempted TSs are not on these TRXs. That’s
why the TRXs of the cell for which the 2 following conditions are fulfilled have all their PDCHs locked by the preemption
process, it means that they cannot accept anymore traffic:
� Nb_GCH_Impacted_By_CS_Preemption > 0
� Established_Nb_GCH – Nb_GCH_Impacted_By_CS_Preemption <= Min_Nb_GCH_GBR
� Where:
� Nb_GCH_Impacted_By_CS_Preemption is the number of established GCHs in the M-EGCH link using a basic Abis
nibble mapped onto a radio time slot that is being deallocated by the BSC.
� Established_Nb_GCH is is the number of GCHs that are activated in the M-EGCH link and that will be kept activated
during a certain time.
� Min_Nb_GCH_GBR is an estimation of the minimum number of GCHs necessary in a given M-EGCH link for the GBR
(Guaranteed Bit Rate) traffic supported by the TRX in both directions (UL and DL).
Step 2: soft preemption process
� 2 kinds of TBF are candidate for the T1 re-allocation process:
� The TBFs whose PACCH is supported by a preempted time slot.
� The TBFs for which it will no longer be possible to serve their on-going max allowed (M)CS because of the subsequent
reduction of the M-EGCH link size of their TRX.
� In addition, in the case where the number of TBFs established on a TRX will become too high according to the remaining
number of GCHs in the M-EGCH link of the TRX, then some TBFs will be released.
Step 3: fast preemption process
� At T_PDCH_Preemption timer expiry:
� The TBFs which could not be T1 reallocated are released.
� The locked PDCHs which do not carry PACCH are released (TBF throughput reduction).
� The GCHs using the basic Abis nibbles of the preempted radio TSs are released.
Step 4: unlock the PDCHs:
� If some PDCHs were “locked” in step 1, they are unlocked. Indeed, the CS preemption process is over, so the existing M-EGCH
links will no longer be disturbed by the release of some of their GCHs due to the fast preemption.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 53
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 53
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
SPDCH De-allocation: Preemption Mechanism [cont.] B10
Fast preemption
Soft preemption
Unlock PDCHs
Arrival of RR
Allocation
indication message
Lock PDCHsOn TRXs with all its basic Abis
nibbles impacted by CS
preemption
No T1 reallocation will be
triggered during
T_PDCH_Preemption
TBF resources of the MSs are
released.
TCH ressources shall not be
deallocated
� Case of resources allocated in DTM mode
The preemption of a PDCH in the “TCH state” is controlled by the BSC Through arrival of RR Allocation
Indication message
That situation is rare as the TSs used for an MS in DTM mode are only allocated in the “non preemptable PS
zone”
A PDCH supporting a BE TBF for an MS in DTM mode can be preempted by the BSC. That situation can occur:
� if a RR Usage Indication message indicating the TSs used by the BE TBFs crosses a RR Allocation Indication
message sent by the BSC which preempts some of those TSs.
� or due to a change of the “non preemptable PS zone” of the cell
In such situation the following algorithm shall be applied:
� tep 1: Identical to non DTM case
� Step 2: The same conditions as non DTM ones apply
If the DTM TBF resources are impacted by the CS preemption , the a notification message will be
sent to RRM-PPCC. This notification message will be ignored by RRM-PCC and no T1 reallocation
will be triggered by RRM-PCC.
� Step 3: fast preemption process
The same conditions as non DTM ones apply
RRM-PCC will release the TBF resources (both UL and DL) of the MSs. The TCH resources shall not
be deallocated (TCH resource deallocation will happen on BSC-Shared-DTM-Info-Indication
reception in the nominal case)
� Step 4: unlock the PDCHs:
Identical to non DTM case
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 54
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 54
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
SPDCH De-allocation: Soft Preemption
� The MFS locks all the PDCHs impacted by the CS preemption:
� i.e. The de-allocated PDCH indicated in the RR Allocation Indication message sent by the BSC (the PDCHs to be preempted)
The MFS locks also all the PDCHs of the TRX which have a GCH mapped on a RTS impacted by preemption
and only in case of all the GCHs of the TRX are impacted by the preemption (rare case).
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 55
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 55
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
SPDCH De-allocation: Soft Preemption [cont.]
� 2 kinds of TBF are candidate for the T1 re-allocation process:
� The TBFs whose PACCH is supported by a preempted time slot.
� The TBFs for which it will no longer be possible to serve their on-going max allowed (M)CS because of the subsequent reduction of the M-EGCH link size of their TRX.
TRX1
TRX2
TRX3
TRX4
RSL
OML
31
TRX1
TRX3
BCCH SD
TBF1 – CS2
PDCHs to
be
preemptedBonus Bonus
.
.
.TBF2 is candidate for
T1 re-allocation
Abis
TBF2 – MCS7
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 56
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 56
2 Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
SPDCH De-allocation: Fast Preemption
� Fast preemption:
� At expiry of T_PDCH_PREEMPTION, the MFS de-allocates the TS before TBF ending, having the following impacts:
� The TBFs whose PACCH is impacted (the corresponding PDCH is marked) are released.
� The MFS sends a “Packet TBF release” message with polling (i.e acknowledgement is requested)
� The TBFs whose PACCH is not impacted are not released but have a throughput reduction.
� The MFS sends a “Packet PDCH release” message indicating the preempted PDCHs
� T_PDCH_PREEMPTION = TCH_INFO_PERIOD –1 = 4s
� T_PDCH_PREEMPTION cannot be set at the OMC-R anymore
The PACCH blocks are the most important blocks to monitor. Many GPRS features ensure that PACCH blocks
are always monitored by the MS:
� The PTCCH is carried by the same PDCH as the PACCH.
� The RXLEV measurements for the power control and CS adaptation are made on the PDCH that carries the
PACCH blocks.
� Some RLS mechanisms are based on whether or not the MS is able to send or listen to PACCH blocks.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 57
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 57
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 58
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 58
� ASAP: used for BE TBF establishment, T1, T2 and T4 reallocation
� Its goal is to serve the request as soon as possible.
� OPTIMAL: used for T3 reallocation
� Its goal is to ensure that a significant bandwidth will be offered to the MS upon T3 reallocation, even if it takes some time to establish all the necessary GCHs
� Nb_GCH_For_TBF_Estab:
� Minimum number of GCHs, which are required on the TRX to serve the request.
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Definition of the 2 TBF Allocation Policies
1 to 5 (Max_Allowed_(M)CS of concurrent TBF)OptimalT3 TBF reallocation (MS in PTM or in DTM
1ASAPDTM allocation request
1 to 2 (Max_Allowed_CS of concurrent TBF)ASAPT4 TBF reallocation
1ASAPT1 TBF reallocation
1 to 5 (Max_Allowed_(M)CS of concurrent TBF)ASAPTBF establishment (with concurrent)
1ASAPTBF establishment (without concurrent)
Nb_GCH_For_EstabPolicyType of request
New B10
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 59
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 59
� Depends on the type of TBF (GPRS / EGPRS) and of the direction of the TBF (UL / DL)
� Is based on the number of established GCHs:
� Established_Nb_GCH – Nb_GCH_Impacted_CS_Preemption
� Is limited by:
� GPRS / EGPRS TRX capability,
� MAX_GPRS_CS and MAX_EGPRS_MCS
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Determination of the Max_Allowed_(M)CS of a TBF
CS-4≥ 2
CS-2 (UL) / CS-1 (DL)1
Max_Allowed_CSNb_GCH
MCS-9≥ 5
MCS-74
MCS-63
MCS-52
MCS-2 (UL) / MCS-1 (DL)1
Max_Allowed_MCSNb_GCH
Established_Nb_GCH is is the number of GCHs that are activated in the M-EGCH link and that will be kept
activated during a certain time.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 60
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 60
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Functional Entities
Candidate TS allocation
Best-effort TBF allocation/reallocation request (received from RRM-PCC or dequeued from an Li list)
TRX list computing
Cf. session 2.2
Best candidate allocation computation
No candidate TS allocation
RADIO RESOURCE ALLOCATION/REALLOCATION ALGORITHM
TBF ESTABLISHMENT PROCESS
Cell Transmission Equity
“Enough GCHs” “Not enough GCHs”
“ALLOC OK” case
“ALLOC FAILED” case
Test if enough GCHs
Available_Nb_GCH_With_Equity
TRX list
Transmission Resource Availability
DSP congestion state
TRX list sorted by the BSC
Available_Nb_GCH
Transmission resource reservation
n_MS_requested, n_MS_requested_concurrent
Multislot class, Bias, Traffic type
Number of radio TSs
determination
Type of the TBF request
PDCH capacity/TFI/TAI/USF allocation
- rejected request - or L4 queuing - or L5/L6 queuing - or L7 queuing) - or try to change TBF mode (EGPRS case)
L4
� The list of DL TBFs which are still not served (due to a lack of resources).
� This list is sorted according to the PDU lifetime of the first DL LLC PDU of each queued request.
� On PDU lifetime expiry, the request is removed from the queue.
L5
� The list of MSs with UL bias which are candidate for resource re-allocation due to trigger T3.
� This list is sorted according to the following criteria:
� The candidate MSs are processed according to a FIFO order: the first request posted in the list is the
first processed by RRM PRH.
� In case it is not possible to reallocate resources to a candidate MS, the MS is put back at the end of
the list.
L6
� The list of MSs with DL bias which are candidate for resource re-allocation due to trigger T3.
� This list is sorted in the same way as L5.
L7
� The list of MSs which are candidate for resource re-allocation due to trigger T4.
� The candidate MSs are processed according to a FIFO order: the first request posted in the list is the first
processed by RRM PRH.
� In case it is not possible to reallocate resources to a candidate MS, the MS is put back at the end of the
list.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 61
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 61
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Transmission Resource Availability
Candidate TS allocation
Best -effort TBF allocation/reallocation request (received from RRM -PCC or dequeued from an Li list)
TRX listcomputing
Cf. session 2.2
Best candidate allocation computation
No candidate TS allocation
RADIO RESOURCE ALLOCATION/REALLOCATION ALGORITHM
TBF ESTABLISHMENT PROCESS
Cell Transmission Equity
“Enough GCHs” “Not enough GCHs”
“ALLOC OK” case
“ALLOC FAILED” case
Test if enough GCHs
Available_Nb_GCH_With_Equity
TRX list
Transmission Resource Availability
DSP congestion state
TRX list sorted
by the BSC
Available_Nb_GCH
Transmission resource reservation
n_MS_requested,n_MS_requested_concurrent
Multislot class,Bias,Traffic type
Numberof radio TSsdetermination
Type of the TBF request
PDCH capacity/TFI/TAI/USF allocation
- rejected request- or L4 queuing
- or L5/L6 queuing
- or L7 queuing )- or try to change TBF mode (EGPRS case)
B10
The transmission resource Availibility step determines the total number of new GCHs which can be established:
� with free Abis and Ater resources (only the non-CS pre emptable Abis ressources are considered for RT PFC)
� with inter-cell GCH preemptions
This number is:
� Available_Nb_GCH in case of Best Effort TBF allocation
� Available_Nb_GCH_for_GBR in case of RT PFC allocation
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 62
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 62
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Transmission Resource Availability: Example
� 3 cells with 2 TRXs:
� Max_PDCH_High_Load = 4 => a maximum of 4 non CS preemptable basic Abis nibbles can be established in the cell
� MAX_PDCH = 8, MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS-9, MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-4
� Max_SPDCH_Limit = 6 =>a maximum of 6 basic Abis nibbles can be established in the cell
CS
radioCell A
Cell B
Cell C
Abis
Basic
nibbles
6x4
extra
nibbles
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 63
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 63
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Transmission Resource Availability: Example [cont.]
� First EDGE MS1, class 8 in cell A -> Target_Nb_GCH = 18
� GCH Allocation for MS1
� 4 basic Abis nibbles in the Max_PDCH_High_Load zone
� 14 extra Abis nibbles
� Total = 18 GCHs
Cell A
Cell B
Cell C
basic
extra
CSMS1
CSCell A
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 64
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 64
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Transmission Resource Availability: Example [cont.]
� Second EDGE MS2, class 8 in cell B -> Target_Nb_GCH = 18
� GCH Allocation for MS2� 4 basic Abis nibbles in the Max_PDCH_High_Load zone
� 10 free extra Abis nibbles
� 2 basic Abis nibbles outside the Max_PDCH_High_Load zone
� Inter GCH preemption between Cell A and Cell B:� 14 extra Abis in cell A, 10 extra Abis in cell B
� 2 extra Abis nibbles are preempted from Cell A to Cell B
� Total = 18 GCHs
basic
extra
Cell A
Cell B
Cell C
CSMS1MS2
CSCell ACell B
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 65
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 65
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Transmission Resource Availability: Example [cont.]
� After GCH allocation of MS2 in cell B
� In Cell A: Established_Nb_GCH = 16
�Next Periodical GCH process in Cell A: Equity process
� 2 basic Abis nibbles outside the Max_PDCH_High_Load zone
� Total = 16 + 2 = 18 GCHs
basic
extra
CSMS1MS2
CSCell ACell B
Cell A
Cell B
Cell C
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 66
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 66
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Transmission Resource Availability: High Ater Usage
� Each time some radio resources are allocated on a new PDCH of a TRX
� No radio resources were formerly allocated on this PDCH for some TBFs
� If the Ater is in “high” usage
� Percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU > Ater_Usage_Threshold
� Then, the number of GCHs targeted per PDCH is reduced
� Target_Nb_GCH_per_PDCH x GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage
� In case of DTM:
� Ater_Usage_Threshold is not taken into account
B10
For other cases, each time some radio resources (for a TBF or for an RT PFC) are allocated on a new PDCH
of a TRX (“new PDCH” means that no radio resources were formerly allocated on this PDCH for some TBFs
or for some RT PFCs), then a value called alpha_HiAter shall be associated to this PDCH.
The value of alpha_HiAter to be associated to a “newly-used” PDCH is computed as follows:
� If the Ater usage of the GPU is “normal” (nominal case):
� alpha_HiAter = 1,
� If the Ater usage of the GPU is “high” (“high Ater usage” situation):
� alpha_HiAter = GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage,
� with GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage the O&M parameter value.
The value of alpha_HiAter is used in the Target_Nb_GCH computing.
If the Ater usage of the GPU is “high”, this will have the effect of applying a GCH reduction factor
(GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage) to the number of GCHs targeted per PDCH, when “opening” new
PDCHs.
Some consequences of this mechanism are:
� If the Ater usage of the GPU becomes “high”, then the Ater consumption will increase more slowly from
this moment,
� If the Ater usage of the GPU stays “high” for a long time, and if the PDCH “closure” and “(re)opening”
rate is sufficient in the GPU, then the GCH reduction factor (GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage) will tend
to be applied on many of the TRXs managed by the GPU, which will lead to a “pseudo-equity” in the usage
of the Ater resources of the GPU.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 67
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 67
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Transmission Resource Availability: High Ater Usage [cont.]
� Example:
� Considering an M–EGCH link of a TRX supporting one 4-TS best-effort EGPRS TBF
� MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS-9
� GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage = 0.75
� Target_Nb_GCH = 1*4.49+1*4.49+1*4.49+1*4.49 = 18 GCHs if Ater usage of the GPU is “normal”
� Target_Nb_GCH = 0.75*4.49+0.75*4.49+0.75*4.49+0.75*4.49 = 14 GCHs if Ater usage of the GPU is “high”
For other cases, each time some radio resources (for a TBF or for an RT PFC) are allocated on a new PDCH
of a TRX (“new PDCH” means that no radio resources were formerly allocated on this PDCH for some TBFs
or for some RT PFCs), then a value called alpha_HiAter shall be associated to this PDCH.
The value of alpha_HiAter to be associated to a “newly-used” PDCH is computed as follows:
� If the Ater usage of the GPU is “normal” (nominal case):
� alpha_HiAter = 1,
� If the Ater usage of the GPU is “high” (“high Ater usage” situation):
� alpha_HiAter = GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage,
� with GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage the O&M parameter value.
The value of alpha_HiAter is used in the Target_Nb_GCH computing.
If the Ater usage of the GPU is “high”, this will have the effect of applying a GCH reduction factor
(GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage) to the number of GCHs targeted per PDCH, when “opening” new
PDCHs.
Some consequences of this mechanism are:
� If the Ater usage of the GPU becomes “high”, then the Ater consumption will increase more slowly from
this moment,
� If the Ater usage of the GPU stays “high” for a long time, and if the PDCH “closure” and “(re)opening”
rate is sufficient in the GPU, then the GCH reduction factor (GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage) will tend
to be applied on many of the TRXs managed by the GPU, which will lead to a “pseudo-equity” in the usage
of the Ater resources of the GPU.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 68
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 68
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Number of Radio TS Determination
Candidate TS allocation
Best-effort TBF allocation/reallocation request (received from RRM-PCC or dequeued from an Li list)
TRX list computing
Cf. session 2.2
Best candidate allocation computation
No candidate TS allocation
RADIO RESOURCE ALLOCATION/REALLOCATION ALGORITHM
TBF ESTABLISHMENT PROCESS
Cell Transmission Equity
“Enough GCHs” “Not enough GCHs”
“ALLOC OK” case
“ALLOC FAILED” case
Test if enough GCHs
Available_Nb_GCH_With_Equity
TRX list
Transmission Resource Availability
DSP congestion state
TRX list sorted by the BSC
Available_Nb_GCH
Transmission resource reservation
n_MS_requested, n_MS_requested_concurrent
Multislot class, Bias, Traffic type
Number of radio TSs
determination
Type of the TBF request
PDCH capacity/TFI/TAI/USF allocation
- rejected request - or L4 queuing - or L5/L6 queuing - or L7 queuing) - or try to change TBF mode (EGPRS case)
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 69
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 69
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Number of Radio TS Determination [cont.]
� The number of radio TSs is determined for:
� The direction of the request (n_MS_requested)
� The concurrent direction (n_MS_requested_concurrent)
� Taken into account
� The MS multislot class, (or DTM (E)GPRS multislot class)
� Maximum number of PDCH allocated to a single (E)GPRS connection:
� MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF
� The direction mainly used (in terms of throughput) by the on-going application: the bias
� The MFS counts and averages the number of bytes transferred in both directions
� By default bias = DL� Except when the first TBF establishment is a “UL 2 phase access”
� Extended Dynamic Allocation allowed or not (EN_EDA)
� The traffic type
� Only 1 TS is allocated in case of GMM/SM signaling traffic
B10
When allocating resources to an MS, both n_MS_requested and n_MS_requested_concurrent are considered, even when only one TBF is
established or being established, to take into account a potential future concurrent TBF, except in case of UL TBF establishment
without concurrent DL TBF (Immediate UL TBF establishment), where only n_MS_requested is taken into account to allocate resources
for the UL TBF.
General purpose of the bias determination:
�GPRS MSs are often involved in consecutive UL/DL transfers for a unique service.
� The Bias determination shall identify the direction of the main flow of data (based on the quantity of data exchanged at a specific
moment) in order to prioritize:
� The initial allocation on the biased direction.
� The re-allocation process on the main direction (likely to carry the useful data).
Each time n_received_octets_UL = N_BIAS_DETERMINATION or n_sent_octets_DL = N_BIAS_DETERMINATION (whichever is reached first),
RRM determines the bias as follows:
� if Av_n_received_octets_UL > Av_n_sent_octets_DL, the transfer is deemed uplink biased,
� else the transfer is deemed downlink biased.
� RRM then resets to 0 the counters n_received_octets_UL and n_sent_octets_DL.
Where:
� n_received_octets_UL represents the number of octets received in the UL.
� n_sent_octets_DL represents the number of octets sent in the DL.
� Av_n_received_octets_UL represents an average number of octets received in the UL.
� Av_n_sent_octets_DL represents an average number of octets sent in the DL.
� Av_n_received_octets_UL (new) = WEIGHT_BIAS_DETERMINATION * Av_n_received_octets_UL (old) + (1 -
WEIGHT_BIAS_DETERMINATION) * n_received_octets_UL.
� Av_n_sent_octets_DL (new) = WEIGHT_BIAS_DETERMINATION * Av_n_sent_octets_DL (old) + (1 - WEIGHT_BIAS_DETERMINATION) *
n_sent_octets_DL.
� N_BIAS_DETERMINATION and WEIGHT_BIAS_DETERMINATION are MFS (DLS) parameters used to tune the bias determination. The
weighting factor is used in particular to avoid changing too quickly the bias of a transfer so that this determination takes into account
the number of octets exchanged in the past.
Default values:
� N_BIAS_DETERMINATION = 3 KB
� WEIGHT_BIAS_DETERMINATION = 0,7
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 70
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 70
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Best Candidate Allocation Computation
Candidate TS allocation
Best-effort TBF allocation/reallocation request (received from RRM-PCC or dequeued from an Li list)
TRX list computing
Cf. session 2.2
Best candidate allocation computation
No candidate TS allocation
RADIO RESOURCE ALLOCATION/REALLOCATION ALGORITHM
TBF ESTABLISHMENT PROCESS
Cell Transmission Equity
“Enough GCHs” “Not enough GCHs”
“ALLOC OK” case
“ALLOC FAILED” case
Test if enough GCHs
Available_Nb_GCH_With_Equity
TRX list
Transmission Resource Availability
DSP congestion state
TRX list sorted by the BSC
Available_Nb_GCH
Transmission resource reservation
n_MS_requested, n_MS_requested_concurrent
Multislot class, Bias, Traffic type
Number of radio TSs
determination
Type of the TBF request
PDCH capacity/TFI/TAI/USF allocation
- rejected request - or L4 queuing - or L5/L6 queuing - or L7 queuing) - or try to change TBF mode (EGPRS case)
B10
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 71
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 71
�GPRS
� EGPRS
� The same states and parameters are used
� But, only EGPRS TBFs are taken into account
� Specific state for GPRS UL TBF allocation: EGPRS PDCH� PDCH used in the DL by an 8-PSK capable EGPRS TBF
� TCH State: If a TCH has been allocated by the MFS on this PDCH for a DTM-capable MS
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
SPDCH States
MAX_XX_TBF_SPDCH
PDCH
FULL
PDCH
ACTIVEPDCH
ALLOCATED
PDCH
TCH State
B10
Following states are defined for a PDCH:
� Allocated: the PDCH is an SPDCH which has been indicated as usable for PS traffic by the BSC.
� Active: an allocated PDCH is active if it supports at least one radio resource allocated for a TBF or for an
RT PFC.
� Full: an allocated PDCH is full in a given XL (XL = UL or DL) direction if and only if:
� for GPRS Best Effort TBF: Nb_RT_PFC_XL + Nb_BE_TBF_XL ≥ MAX_XL_TBF_SPDCH
� for EGPRS Best Effort TBF: Nb_RT_PFC_XL + Nb_BE_EGPRS_TBF_XL ≥ MAX_XL_TBF_SPDCH
� for RT resource allocation: Nb_RT_PFC_XL + Nb_BE_TBF_XL ≥ MAX_XL_TBF_SPDCH
� This is the same definition as in B8 release except that the concepts of RT PFC and best effort TBF
are introduced.
� EGPRS: An allocated PDCH is in the “EGPRS” state if some radio resources are allocated in the DL
direction, for an EGPRS TBF or an EGPRS RT PFC. This state is only used when running the radio resource
allocation/reallocation algorithm in GPRS mode and when considering the UL direction of the candidate
TBF allocations.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 72
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 72
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Available Throughput Computation
� For a GPRS TBF, in case of only BE TBFs with the same priority
� available_throughput_candidate_XL = R_AVERAGE_GPRS *
� NB_TBFPDCHi represents the number of already allocated GPRS and EGPRS TBFs on the PDCH i
� For an EGPRS TBF, in case of only BE TBFs with the same priority
� available_ throughput _candidate_XL = R_AVERAGE_EGPRS *
� NB_TBFPDCHi represents the number of already allocated EGPRS TBFs on the PDCH i
∑= +
n
1i PDCHi 1NB_TBF
1
∑= +
n
1i PDCHi 1NB_TBF
1
Appendix
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 73
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 73
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Candidate TS Allocation Sorting
� The criteria of the TBF radio resource allocation/reallocation algorithm are “throughput-based”:
� ALPHA/ For “ASAP” policy only: the candidate time slot allocations, which are on some TRXs for which (Established_Nb_GCH - Nb_MPDCH) is greater than Nb_GCH_For_TBF_Estab” are preferred
� A/ For UL GPRS TBF establishment / reallocation only: the candidate time slot allocations, which have the lowest number of PDCHs in the “EGPRS” state are preferred
� B/ the candidate time slot allocations, which have the highest available throughput in the direction of the bias are preferred
� C/ the candidate time slot allocations, which have the highest available throughput in the direction opposite to the bias are preferred
� D/ the candidate time slot allocations, which are on the TRX with the highest priority, are preferred
� E/ for EGPRS TBFs establishments only: the candidate time slot allocations, which have the lowest number of GPRS TBFs in the direction of the bias, are preferred
� F/ combinations with the PDCHs that have the lowest index are preferred
Exercise1 Exercise2
When evaluating criterion [F], the concurrence constraints imposed by the MS multislot class (if it is known)
or by the default multislot class (if the MS multislot class is not known) shall be taken into account. This
will indeed avoid unnecessary subsequent T2 TBF reallocations (after having established an incoming TBF
without concurrent TBF).
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 74
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Criterion [DTM A]: The TS of a candidate timeslot allocation supporting the TCH shall not be taken into account in the evaluation of this criterion.
This criterion is only relevant for:
� GPRS DTM allocation request
� T3 GPRS TBF reallocation request for an MS in DTM mode when considering the UL direction of a
candidate timesolt allocation.
Criterion [DTM TCH 1]: Nb_BE_TBF_XL indicates the total number of BE TBFs (GPRS or EGPRS) which have some radio resources allocated on the considered PDCH in a given direction.
Criterion [DTM TCH 2]: This criterion is only applicable for an MS whose DTM [E]GPRS multislot class is 11.
This criterion shall not be applied for an MS whose DTM [E]GPRS multislot class is 5 or 9.
This criterion has for goal to allow (if possible) a future T3 reallocation of the UL TBF of the DTM MS from
DA to EDA mode
Example :
Criterion [DTM TCH 3]: For an MS whose DTM [E]GPRS multislot class is 11, criterion [DTM TCH 2] will have precedence over this criterion, thus preventing (if possible) the usage of the “leftmost” TS of the TRX of a
TCH allocation.
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 74
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Candidate TS Allocation Sorting [cont.]
� The criteria of the TBF radio resource allocation/reallocation algorithm in case of DTM mode are “throughput-based”:
� DTM A/ The candidate time slot allocations, which have the lowest number of PDCHs in the “EGPRS” state are preferred
� DTM B/ the candidate time slot allocations, which have the highest available throughput in the direction of the bias are preferred
� DTM C/ the candidate time slot allocations, which have the highest available throughput in the direction opposite to the bias are preferred
� DTM TCH 1/ the candidate time slot allocations for which (Nb_BE_TBF_DL + Nb_BE_TBF_UL)
� Is the lowest on the TS supporting the TCH are preferred
� DTM D/ the candidate time slot allocations, which are on the TRX with the highest priority, are preferred
� DTM TCH 2/ for an MS class 11, the candidate time slot allocations whose TCH is located on TS(n), with n>=1 and with TS(n-1) valid to support TBFs resources in both UL and DL are preferred
� DTM TCH 3/ the candidate time slot allocations whose TCH has the lowest TS index (on a given TRX) is prefered
B10
If only TS0 and TS1 are allocated, a DTM
request for a MS class 11 will be reserved on
TS0 (DL and UL), TCH on TS1. If a third TS is
allocated, a T3 reallocation of the UL TBF to
EDA will be possible
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 75
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 75
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Re-allocation
� 4 different TBF reallocations are permanently activated:
� T1: reallocation to maintain a TBF alive despite the CS preemption of someRTSs or of some GCHs in the cell
� T2: reallocation of an on-going TBF when establishing a concurrent TBF
� T3: reallocation useful to� Establish a new M-EGCH link for one of the TRXs of the cell
� Perform a “radio de-fragmentation” process
� Provide a higher throughput, if it is possible, to a TBF
� Reallocate the UL TBFs established in the cell� From DA to EDA mode, or from EDA to DA mode
� T4: reallocation to move a UL GPRS TBF sharing one PDCH with a DL EGPRS TBF onto PDCHs which do not support a DL EGPRS TBF. It concerns only GPRS TBFs
� In case of DTM mode, reallocations are forbidden (MR1)
B10
To be candidate to subsequent resource re-allocation (T3 and T4), the following conditions have to be met:
� the TBF established in the biased direction is marked with “subsequent allocation”.
� more than N_CANDIDATE_FOR_REALLOC bytes have been transferred for the TBF in the biased direction.
� T3192 is not running (specific to UL TBF re-allocation when T3192 is running for the DL TBF).
Note: the case where an UL TBF is established using EDA, the MS bias become equal DL and the DL TBF
(concurrent of the UL TBF) is released is neglected. In this case, as there is no TBF established in the
direction of the bias (DL), the MS will not be candidate for T3 reallocation, and the reallocation from EDA
to DA will not operate for the UL TBF, even if the usage of EDA is no longer valid for this UL TBF.
The subsequent re-allocation is done whether or not the TBF corresponds to the bias transfer direction of
the MS.
N_CANDIDATE_FOR_REALLOC default value = 200 Bytes, it cannot be set at OMC-R level.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 76
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 76
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Re-allocation [cont.]
� T3 TBF reallocation:
� A T3 TBF reallocation is based on the following principles:
� Computing of a THROUGHPUT_RATIO (= Allocated_Throughput / Optimal_Throughput) to know “how sub-optimal a TBF allocation is”
� A T3 TBF reallocation will only be allowed if a significant THROUGHPUT_RATIO gain is reached. The minimal gain is set by the system parameter: MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN (= 40%)
THROUGHPUT_RATIO:
� for each MS which is candidate for a T3 TBF reallocation, a “throughput ratio” is calculated.
� this “throughput ratio” is useful to:
� validate the candidate TBF allocations when playing the radio resource reallocation algorithm.
� sort the T3 TBF reallocation requests within the L5 and L6 lists: low value of the “throughput ratio”
means high priority of the request.
� THROUGHPUT_RATIO = ALLOCATED_THROUGHPUT / OPTIMAL_THROUGHPUT
� ALLOCATED_THROUGHPUT is the throughput currently allocated to the TBF in the direction of the bias
and is equal to potential_throughput_PDCH * available_capacity_candidate_XL.
� OPTIMAL_THROUGHPUT is the optimal throughput that could be potentially allocated to the TBF in the
direction of the bias by considering its multislot class and is equal to potential_throughput_PDCH *
n_MS_requested.
Best candidate allocation computation:
a candidate TBF allocation shall fulfill the following conditions:
� NEW_THROUGHPUT_RATIO min(1, (1+MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN ) * CURRENT_THROUGHPUT_RATIO).
� NEW_THROUGHPUT_RATIO is the “throughput ratio” of the candidate TBF allocation.
� CURRENT_THROUGHPUT_RATIO is the “throughput ratio” of the current TBF allocation.
� MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN is an O&M parameter.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 77
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 77
3 TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-Allocation
Re-allocation: Example
� Initial situation:
� 3 MSs (MSa, MSb, and MSc), all GPRS and (4+1)
� MSC is the most impacted by the multiplexing in terms of throughput
� Final Situation:
� MSC is candidate for T3 reallocation
� A new TRX will be established (cf. “Optimal” policy) and MSc will then be reallocated on this new TRX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DL
UL
MSaMSaMSaMSa MSbMSbMSbMSb
MScMScMScMSc
MSc MSbMSa
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DL
UL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DL
UL
MSaMSaMSaMSa MSbMSbMSbMSb
MSbMSa
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DL
UL
MScMScMScMSc
MSc
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 78
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 78
4 TBF Release Routine
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 79
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 79
4 TBF Release Routine
Justification
�Wap access to home page without any feature
�With Delayed DL TBF Release (B7)
�With Delayed DL TBF TBF Release & (I) Extended UL TBF Mode (B10)
� Typical gain on Wap access to home page: � ~8 seconds with Delayed DL TBF Release
� + ~2 seconds with Extended UL TBF Mode
� New B10 feature to enhance MS battery saving
UL
DL
B10
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 80
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 80
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed DL TBF Release
(1): There is no more DL LLC PDU stored for the MS. The BSS sends the last segment of the last useful RLC
block. This block contains the last segment of the last useful DL LLC PDU, completed by a dummy LLC
PDU in order to maintain the DL TBF alive. The Final Block Indicator is not set (FBI=0) and a polling is
requested to the MS. T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Pol_Initial is activated (default value = 100 ms).
(2): When the MS has acknowledged the last useful DL RLC block, T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel is activated
(duration of the delayed DL TBF release phase).
(3): At T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Pol_Initial expiry, a new RLC block containing one or more dummy LLC PDUs is
sent to the MS. This RLC block contains a polling indication so that the MS can request a UL TBF
establishment, if required. T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Pol (default value = 200 ms) is activated.
(4): At T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel expiry, a last DL RLC block is sent with the Final Block Indicator set (FBI = 1),
indicating the end of the DL TBF. The normal release procedure then applies.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 81
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 81
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed DL TBF Release [cont.]
� Artificial extended DL TBF duration aiming at coping with jerky DL traffic from the CN
� Procedure:
� the last DL RLC blocks are marked with FBI=0
� the TBF state goes from Active to Delayed
� periodical Dummy DL RLC blocks in polling (S/P=1) sent by the MFS to trigger acknowledgement from the MS (FAI=0)
� when a new DL LLC PDU arrives at the MFS, the useful RLC Block transfer is resumed
� the TBF state goes from Delayed to Active
� The MS does not take into account Dummy LLC PDU during the delayed release phase
Jerky LLC PDU delivery at MFS due to buffer capacities of servers, SGSN and MFS. A TCP segment can
generate up to 3 LLC PDUs. Also called “Bursty traffic”. HTTP and WAP services are likely to benefit from
this feature.
FBI: Final Block Indicator (RLC header)
FAI: Final Acknowledgement Indicator
S/P: triggers polling (packet Ack/Nack message) when set to 1
Periodical sending of DL RLC Blocks = polling period calculation: the MFS takes into consideration T3190
(guarding timer between 2 valid data received from the Network) in addition to the requirement of
receiving at least one block every 360 ms (78 TDMA frames). (T3190n = 5 s (Alcatel recommended value), it
cannot be set at OMC-R level).
T3190n = Timer used in the procedure “DL TBF abnormal release”: when the DL TBF is cut due to the radio
link quality or loss of the MS, the TFI and TAI cannot be reallocated during T3190n. The default value is 5s
and it cannot be set at the OMC-R level.
The UL Delayed TBF release (scheduling of additional USF) is only possible for Rel-4 MS.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 82
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 82
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed DL TBF Release [cont.]
� End of delayed released period when T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel expires
� T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel = T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME
� The MFS sends a Dummy UI command marked with FBI=1, S/P=1
� Acknowledged mode:
� The MS sends the last Packet DL Ack/Nack message (FAI=1)
� Non-Acknowledged mode:
� The MS sends the last Packet Control Ack message
� T3192n and T3192 are triggered (Fast DL re-establishment)
T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME corresponds to the time difference between a command sent to the SGSN and
the response received at the MFS. The default value is 700ms but it can be set at OMC-R level and can be
tuned according to Gb traces.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 83
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 83
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed DL TBF Release [cont.]
� RRM periods on MFS side:
� T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL_INITIAL (=60ms): the time that the MFS shall wait before sending the first RLC data block containing only LLC Dummy UI
� 2 timers are used to define the period between 2 DL Dummy UIs sent to the MS:
� T_MIN_POLL (=60ms), in case of the MS is “alone” on the PDCH which carries the PACCH
� T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL (=200ms) in case of the MS is “multiplexed” on the PDCH which carries the PACCH
� T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL_UL (=2s): the period between 2 DL Dummy UIs sent to the MS, when there is an on-going UL TBF
Upon each expiry of T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL (the timer reaches T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL_INITIAL or
T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL), a new Dummy UI command is inserted and T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL is restarted.
T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL_INITIAL = 60 ms
T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL = 200 ms
T_MIN_POLL = 60 ms
T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL_UL = 2000 ms
All these timer values are default ones and they cannot be set at OMC-R level.
T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL is used to:
� give the opportunity to the MS to request a UL TBF through the Packet DL Ack/Nack acknowledging the
polling, without too much disturbing the other TBFs (data transfer for the DL and USF scheduling for the UL)
multiplexed on the same PDCH (--> not too short period for Dummy UI commands).
� maintain the DL TBF at MS level (re-activation of T3190 timer (5s) in the MS) (--> period for Dummy UI
commands < 5s).
T_MIN_POLL is applied when the PDCH corresponding to the PACCH of the considered DL TBF is not shared
with another enabled DL TBF and when there is no activated UL TBF on this PDCH (ie, no UL TBF in enabled
or extended mode, for which USF may be scheduled).
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 84
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 84
4 TBF Release Routine
DL TBF Extension
(1): The DL TBF is in delayed DL TBF release phase. Periodically Dummy UI Command messages are sent to
the MS with polling indication to give to the MS the opportunity to send a UL TBF request.
(2): The MS uses a Packet DL Ack/Nack to request a UL TBF. The UL TBF is established and
T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel is stopped (the DL TBF remains in delayed DL TBF release state, during the UL
TBF).
(3): At UL TBF release, the timer T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel is re-activated.
(4): When a DL LLC PDU is received, the first DL RLC data block can be immediately sent and
T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel is stopped.
(5): T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel is stopped, when the first UL RLC data block is received.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 85
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 85
4 TBF Release Routine
DL TBF Extension [cont.]
� When a UL TBF is established during a delayed DL TBF release:
� T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel is stopped and reset
� The delayed DL TBF release state is maintained during the UL TBF
� DL Dummy UIs are sent every T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL_UL
� The aim of this timer is just to maintain the DL TBF at MS level (must be lower than T3190)
� Therefore T_DELAYED_DL_TBF_POL_UL > T_DELAYED_DL_POL
� At the end of the UL TBF, T_Delayed_DL_TBF_Rel is restarted
Exercise
The aim of this function is to avoid the case where a UL TBF is established on the PACCH of a DL TBF which
is at the end of its delayed DL TBF release phase.
Indeed in this case, the subsequent DL LLC PDU (i.e., corresponding to a server response) may be received
after the release of the DL TBF.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 86
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 86
4 TBF Release Routine
Fast DL TBF Re-establishment
� After DL TBF release, the following timers are considered
� MS side
� T3192 started after sending of final Packet DL Ack/Nack message (FAI=1)
� during T3192 the MS listens to the PDCH carrying the PACCH blocks of its last DL TBF
T3192 = 500 ms (default value which can be set at OMC-R level).
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 87
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 87
4 TBF Release Routine
Fast DL TBF Re-establishment [cont.]
� MFS side
� T3192n started after reception of final Packet DL Ack/Nack message
� Wait for reuse of MS radio resources (PDCHs, TAI, TFI)
� If a DL LLC PDU is received by the MFS, a fast DL TBF re-establishment is triggered on the PACCH
� T3192n = T3192 – (T_Round_Trip_Delay + T_Fast_DL_Margin)
� During T3192n, a UL TBF establishment is not possible
During the on-going of T3192n, no UL TBF establishment procedure can be proceeded. This is a limitation to
fast switching from DL TBF to UL TBF during the MS-GSS signaling procedure (location update for example).
In order to avoid a too long duration of these procedures, the MFS anticipates the UL TBF establishment by
starting the procedure before the end of the DL TBF release.
T3192n takes into account the trip time needed for “Packet DL Ack/Nack” message from the MS to the MFS
(½T_Round_Trip_Delay + ½T_Fast_DL_Margin) AND trip time needed for “Packet DL Immediate Assignment
” message from the MFS to the MS (½T_Round_Trip_Delay + ½T_Fast_DL_Margin).
Round_Trip_Delay (MFS-MS) = 160 ms (default value which can be set at OMC-R level).
T_Fast_DL_Margin = 50 ms (default value which cannot be set at OMC-R level).
Note: during T3192n seconds, the Timing Advance is monitored. Even so, if TAI occurs, the MS must send its
Access Burst for the Timing Advance calculation by the BTS. The MS shall listen to the TA Messages in the
DL.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 88
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 88
4 TBF Release Routine
Non-DRX Mode after Packet Data Transfer
� Discontinuous Reception (DRX mode):
� Used in GSM to increase the battery autonomy on an MS as in GSM CS: the MS listens only to its Paging Group
� Downlink TBF establishment through PCH long as compared with the TBF duration
� The MFS establishes a DL TBF on the first available PCH message of an MS Paging group
� Non-DRX:
� Continuous monitoring of AGCH messages by the MS
� The MFS establishes a DL TBF on the first available AGCH block (without MPDCH) or the first PPCH occurrence (with MPDCH)
This feature outlines one of the major differences between the GPRS service (non connected mode) and the
GSM service (connected mode). The DRX mode is highly recommended in GSM to save the cell battery when
it may be a handicap in GPRS (where the paging is likely to occur more frequently).
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 89
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 89
4 TBF Release Routine
Non-DRX Mode after Packet Data Transfer [cont.]
� Non-DRX mode:
� Non-DRX period
� Min (NON_DRX_Timer; DRX_TIMER_MAX)
� Non-DRX period computed by the MFS and sent in “Packet DL Immediate Assignment” message
� The DRX mode of an MS is evaluated each time the MFS receives DL LLC PDU from the SGSN
� The MFS keeps the MS context until expiry of:
� DRX_TIMER_MAX if NON_DRX_Timer unknown for the MS
� Non-DRX period otherwise (provided within the DL LLC PDU)
� DRX_TIMER_MAX limited to 4 seconds, broadcast on SI13
NON_DRX_Timer is unknown for the MFS when after the release of an uplink TBF, no DL concurrent TBF was
Established, or after the release of a downlink TBF when the DL LLC PDUs do not convey the DRX
parameters.
When the MFS assesses that the MS returns to the DRX mode during the transmission of the assignment
message, the message is sent to the PCH or PPCH channel. The MFS shall then take into account the 95%
AGCH or PPCH queuing time (about 400 ms) in addition to the round trip time delay measured at RRM level
(about 160 ms).
Assuming a Non-DRX period of 2 seconds, this means that the downlink LLC PDU shall be received within 1.4
second to speed up the establishment of the DL TBF.
DRX_TIMER_MAX = 2 s (Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 90
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 90
4 TBF Release Routine
DL TBF Release: Summary
DL TBF
T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME
TBF delayed
release
Fast DL TBF establishment via PACCH
TBF active
DL TBF
T3192
Fast DL TBF establishmentvia AGCH or any PPCH
DL TBF
T3192
Non-DRX mode
DRX_TIMER_MAX
DL TBF
T3192
Non-DRX mode
DRX_TIMER_MAX
DL TBF establishment
via PCH or PPCH
of MS paging group
The tables below indicate examples of the expected DL TBF establishment duration with or without the
feature.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 91
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 91
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed UL TBF Release: Without Extended Mode
� The UL TBF release is delayed when:
� T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN <> 0
� No concurrent DL TBF:
� Is established
� Is being established
� Is being Released
� During the delayed UL TBF release:
� The MFS can establish a DL TBF on the PACCH/DL of the UL TBF
� The DL TBF establishment is speeded up
The UL Delayed TBF release (scheduling of additional USF) is only possible for a Rel-4 MS.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 92
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 92
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed UL TBF Release: Without Extended Mode [cont.]
� No DL LLC PDU is received during the delayed final PUAN phase
T3180n
T3180
P. UL Ack/Nack (FAI=0, SSN = n) (3)
RLC/MAC block (BSN=n, CV=0) (1)
(4)
Packet Control Ack (6)
final P. UL ACK/NACK + polling (5)
MS MFS SGSN
LLC PDU (last LLC) (2)
T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN
(7)
(1): The last UL LLC PDU is received by the RLC. The RLC maintains the UL TBF alive since a normal end is
not allowed.
(2): The UL LLC PDU is sent to the RRM. A flag is set by the RLC, in order to notify the RRM that it is the last
UL LLC PDU of the TBF.
(3): A Packet UL Ack/Nack is sent to the MS, without polling, with FAI=0.
This message does not acknowledge the last block (n).
(4): Upon receipt of the last UL LLC PDU, the RRM starts an instance of the timer T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN.
The UL LLC PDU is forwarded to the SGSN.
(5): At T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN expiry, the RRM requests the RLC to release the UL TBF, by sending a
PCC_RLC_Activate-req allowing the RLC to perform a normal TBF end.
The RLC sends the final packet UL Ack/Nack to the MS and waits for Packet Control Acknowledgement.
T3180n is activated (T3180n = T3180 - Round Trip Delay - T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN).
(6): The MS acknowledges the receipt of the final PACKET UL Ack/Nack message.
(7): The RLC notifies the RRM about the release of the UL TBF. The resources of the UL TBF are released.
The RRM informs the BSSGP layer about the release of the UL TBF, and the BSSGP de-allocates the
corresponding throughput. T3180n is stopped.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 93
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 93
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed UL TBF Release: Without Extended Mode [cont.]
� Delayed final PUAN, with DL TBF establishment
T3180nT3180
P. UL Ack/Nack (FAI=0, SSN = n) (3)
RLC/MAC block (BSN=n, CV=0) (1)
(5)
(4)
Packet Control Ack (9)
final P. UL ACK/NACK + polling
LLC PDU (last LLC) (2)
T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN
PACKET DOWNLINK ASSIGNMENT (6)
Packet Control Ack (7)
MS MFS SGSN
DL LLC PDU
(8)
(10)
(1): The last UL LLC PDU is received by the RLC. The RLC maintains the UL TBF alive since normal end is not
allowed.
(2): The UL LLC PDU is sent to the RRM. A flag is set by the RLC, in order to notify the RRM that it is the last
UL LLC PDU of the TBF.
(3): A Packet UL Ack/Nack is sent to the MS, without polling, with FAI=0.
This message does not acknowledge the last block (n).
(4): Upon receipt of the last UL LLC PDU, the RRM starts an instance of the timer T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN.
The UL LLC PDU is forwarded to the SGSN.
(5): A DL LLC PDU is received by the MFS while the timer T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN is running.
(6): Radio resources are requested to RRM-PRH. Upon RRM-PRH response, the RRM-PCC stops the timer
T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN, delays the release of the UL TBF until the completion of the DL TBF
establishment procedure, establishes the DL TBF on the PACCH/DL of the UL TBF.
� If T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN expires before the response of the RRM-PRH, then the RRM-PCC requests the
RLC to release the UL TBF, by sending a PCC_RLC_Activate-req allowing the RLC to perform a normal
TBF end. In this case, at RRM-PCC response, the DL TBF will be established on CCCH, at the end of the
UL TBF release.
(7): The MS acknowledges the receipt of the assignment message and listens to the DL resources. The BSS
sends a Packet Power Control and Timing Advance and then begins the DL data transfer.
(8): Upon receipt of the PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT, the RRM immediately requests the RLC to
release the UL TBF, by sending a pcc-rlc-activate-req primitive allowing the RLC to perform a normal TBF
end. The RLC sends the final PACKET UL Ack/Nack to the mobile station and waits for a PACKET CONTROL
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT.
(9): The MS acknowledges the receipt of the final PACKET UL Ack/Nack message.
(10): The RLC notifies the RRM about the release of the UL TBF. The RRM stops T3180n. The resources of
the UL TBF are released. The RRM informs the BSSGP layer about the release of the UL TBF, and the
BSSGP de-allocates the corresponding throughput.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 94
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 94
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed UL TBF Release: with Extended Mode
� Principle
� At the end of the active phase (CV=0)
� The MFS continues to schedule some USFs
� To allow the MS to send some dummy RLC blocks
P. UL Ack/Nack (FAI=0, SSN = n+1)
RLC/MAC block (BSN=n, CV=0)
Packet Control Ack
final P. UL ACK/NACK + polling
LLC PDU (last LLC)
T_MAX_EXTENDED_ULUSF
Dummy RLC data block
MS MFS SGSN
USF
Dummy RLC data block
...
start
expiry
The aim of this feature is to extend the duration of the UL TBF in order:
� To quickly restart data transmission in UL if higher layers in the MS deliver new data, without having to
re-establish a new UL TBF, after the countdown procedure has started.
� To maintain the UL TBF established, some time after the last block (CV=0) has been acknowledged by the
network.
This feature allows to improve the access time to the GPRS network. It also improves the throughput in
some cases.
The feature is described in 3GPP TS 44.060 - V4.18.0. It applies for R4 MS.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 95
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 95
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed UL TBF Release: with Extended Mode [cont.]
� The UL transfer can resume at any time during the extended phase
P. UL Ack/Nack (FAI=0, SSN = n+1)
RLC/MAC block (BSN=n, CV=0)
LLC PDU (last LLC)
T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL
USF
Dummy RLC data block
MS MFS SGSN
USF
Dummy RLC data block
USF
RLC/MAC block (BSN=n+1)
start
stop
USF
RLC/MAC block (BSN=n+2)
...
Active UL data transfer
Extended UL data transfer
Active UL data transfer
LLC PDU
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 96
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 96
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed UL TBF Release: with Extended Mode [cont.]
� Conditions to operate
� EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF = enabled
� Rel-4 MS
� The MS has to know if the BSS supports the feature
� The BSS capability (NW_EXT_UTBF) is broadcast on BCCH (SI13)
� The BSS has to know if the MS supports the feature
� The MS radio access capability is� received at downlink TBF establishment in the first downlink PDU, or
� retrieved through the Radio Access Capability Update which involves the SGSN
� If EN_RA_CAP _UPDATE = enabled
� If one of these 4 conditions is not fulfilled, the normal UL TBF release is performed, as in B8 (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN is applied)
TLLI context retrieval procedure
� This procedure has been developed in B8 for the feature full intra PDU re-routing.
� The TLLI is known in the SGSN and by one GPU in the MFS. The TLLI retrieval procedure allows to retrieve
information linked to the TLLI, among which the Radio Access Capability from another GPU.
� This procedure can be triggered at uplink TBF establishment, as soon as the contention resolution is
completed.
Radio Access Capability Update
� Enabled or disabled the Radio Access Capability update on Gb by flag, EN_RA_CAP _UPDATE. It is
recommended to enabled this flag if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled and Radio Access Capability
update is supported by the SGSN.
� At UL TBF establishment, immediately after the “contention resolution” procedure, the “radio access
capability update” procedure is triggered in the BSS. The BSS requests an MS’s current Radio Access
capability and/or its IMSI by sending to an SGSN an RA_CAPABILITY_UPDATE, which includes the TLLI of
the MS and a Tag. Then it starts timer T5_RA_CAP_UPDATE (value = 5s). In case of timer expiry, the BSS
shall repeat the request up to RA_CAPABILITY_UPDATE_RETRIES times (value = 3).
� The SGSN shall respond by sending an RA_CAPABILITY_UPDATE_ACK, which includes the TLLI of the MS,
the Tag received in the corresponding RA_CAPABILITY_UPDATE.
� When the SGSN answers, the MS Radio Access capability is updated and the Extended UL feature can be
used if the “GERAN Feature Package 1” bit is set. Otherwise, the MS does not support the extended uplink
feature.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 97
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 97
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed UL TBF Release: with Extended Mode [cont.]
� The way to schedule the USFs in extended UL TBF mode:
� Scheduled only on the PDCH which carries the PACCH
� IF the PDCH supports uplink TBFs which are all in extended mode AND EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED = enabled THEN� the throughput in radio blocks is equally shared between MSs
� So USFs are scheduled as follows:� One MS in extended mode on PACCH: USF scheduled every 20ms
� Two MSs in extended mode on PACCH: USF scheduled every 40ms
� n MSs in extended mode on PACCH: USF scheduled every n x 20ms
� ELSE (if EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED = disabled OR if the PDCH supports at least one MS which is in UL transfer)� A period T_EXTENDED_UL_TBF_POL (200 ms) is used to schedule the USFs for all theMSs in extended mode
� The remaining bandwidth is used for MSs in transfer
� RRBP mechanism has priority over USF scheduling
� This means the USF scheduling may be shifted if RRBP request from the RLC
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 98
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 98
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed UL TBF Release: Improved Extended Mode
� Principle: make optional the MS answers to USF
� BSS sends first USF at each block or every T_EXTENDED_UL_TBF_POL
� In case of no MS answer, N3101 is incremented
� When N3101 reaches N3101_POLLING_THR, BSS sends polling (PUAN with polling request) every T_UL_RLS_EUTM
� In case of no answer to the polling, N_POLLING_EUTM is incremented
�When N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT is reached, Tbf is abnormally released
� Regular USF sent allows MS to resume UL traffic at any time (but N3101 is no more incremented when no MS answer)
B10
Principle is to make optional MS answers to USF in Extended UL phase
When an MS enters Tbf UL releasing phase, BSS knows only if MS supports Extended UL (but can not know if
the MS supports Improved or Normal Extended UL mode)
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 99
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 99
4 TBF Release Routine
Delayed UL TBF Release: Improved Extended Mode [cont.]
� UL transfer can resume at any time during the improved extended phase
P. UL Ack/Nack (FAI=0, SSN = n+1)
RLC/MAC block (BSN=n, CV=0)
Packet Control Ack
P. UL ACK/NACK + polling
LLC PDU (last LLC)
T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL
USF
MS MFS SGSN
USF
...
start
NO ANSWER N3101 ++
NO ANSWER N3101 ++
N3101_POLLING_THR
P. UL ACK/NACK + polling
T_UL_RLS_EUTM
USF
USF
USF
Packet Control Ack
B10
When an MS enters Tbf UL releasing phase, BSS knows only if MS supports Extended UL (but can not know if
the MS supports Improved or Normal Extended UL mode)
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 100
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 100
4 TBF Release Routine
UL TBF Release: Summary
� Delayed final PUAN (without extended mode)
� Extended UL TBF mode
UL TBF
release
T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN
TBF active
UL TBF
release
T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL
TBF active TBF extended
The UL TBF can be released before the expiry of the timer T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL: in case of a concurrent
DL TBF is present and after the completion of DL delayed phase, the expiry of T3192 triggers the release of
the UL TBF.
Consequently, the uplink TBF in extended mode is released when either T3192 expires or
T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL expires.
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 101
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 101
5 Exercises
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 102
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 102
5 Exercises
(E)GPRS Channels
� UL PDTCH and PACCH multiplexing on SPDCH:
� UL transfer? DL transfer?Downlink UplinkBlock number
TFI USF RRBP
Block n
Block n+1
Block n+2
Block n+3
Block n+4
Block n+5
Block n+6
TFI a USF j
TFI b USF k
TFI a USF j + 3
TFI b USF k
TFI b ???
TFI b USF j
TFI a USF k
false
false
false
false
false
false
PDTCH / PACCH a
PDTCH / PACCH b
PDTCH / PACCH a
PDTCH / PACCH b
PDTCH / PACCH b
PDTCH / PACCH a
PDTCH / PACCH b
RLC header MAC header
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Block Content?
Back
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 103
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 103
5 Exercises
Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation
� Considering one cell with the following configuration:
� 4 TRXs in the DCS1800 band
� PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX = 0
� NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
� In the next slide, find the rank of each TRX
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 104
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 104
5 Exercises
Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation [cont.]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
BCCH SDCCHTRX1
TRX2 SDCCH
TRX3
TRX4
TRX_PREF_MARK
0
1
0
1
TRE G3
TRE G4 MP
TRE G3
TRE G4 MP FR
DR
FR
DR
RANK= ?
RANK= ?
RANK= ?
RANK= ?
Back
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 105
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 105
5 Exercises
Autonomous Packet Resource Allocation [cont.]
� Inputs:
� NB_TS = 14, AV_USED_CS=0, AV_USED_PS=11
� MIN_SPDCH=0
� MAX_SPDCH=14
� MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD=2
� HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS=80%
� THR_MARGIN_PRIO_PS=10%
� Find the value of:
� MARGIN_CS, MARGIN_PRIORITY_PS
� MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_CS, MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_PS
� MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT
� Any Remark?
� Define a rule (relationship between some parameters) to fix this non-optimal setting
Time allowed:
30 minutes
Back
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 106
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 106
5 Exercises
TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-allocation
� GPRS allocation on BCCH TRX (7 PDCHs are allocated)
� UL TBFs 1 to 11 are established one after the other
� It is assumed that a concurrent DL TBF is established after the UL, and before the next UL
� All transfers are deemed DL biased
� Inputs:
� BCCH TRX, 1 unique SPDCH group
� NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
� MAX_XX_TBF_PER_SPDCH = 5
� En_Fast_Initial_GPRS_Access = disabled
� The MS GPRS multislot class is given below:
Time allowed:
20 minutesBack
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 107
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 107
5 Exercises
TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-allocation [cont.]
� Fill in the initial TBF allocation TS mapping UL/DL
DL
UL
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 108
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 108
5 Exercises
TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-allocation [cont.]
� GPRS/EGPRS allocation case:
� Cell with 2 PS capable TRXs:
� TRXa: EGPRS capable, SPDCH group = TS0 to TS7
� TRXb: non-EGPRS capable, SPDCH group = TS0 to TS7
� Ordered TRX list: TRXa > TRXb
� En_Fast_Initial_GPRS_Access = enabled
� MIN_PDCH = 1
� NB_TS_MPDCH = 0
� MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-3;
� MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS-6
� Default MS multislot class = 4 + 1
� All the MSs are 4 + 1 MSs
Time allowed:
20 minutesBack
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 109
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 109
5 Exercises
TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-allocation [cont.]
� MS constraints:
� Consecutive establishments:
� MSa: GPRS UL TBF followed by DL TBF
� MSb: EGPRS UL TBF followed by DL TBF
� MSc: GPRS UL TBF followed by DL TBF
� MSd: EGPRS UL TBF followed by DL TBF
� Bias = DL
Time allowed:
20 minutes
Rx Mx
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DL
TxUL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ttb Tra
Rx Rx Rx
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 110
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 110
5 Exercises
TBF Radio Resources Allocation and Re-allocation [cont.]
� Fill in the initial TBF allocation TS mapping UL/DL
DL
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7PDCH
UL
UL
DL
TRXa
EGPRS
TRXb
GPRS
Rank
1
2
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 111
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 111
5 Exercises
DL TBF Release Routine
� DL TBF routine in acknowledged mode
� Fill in the blanks in the diagram of a DL TBF displayed on the next slide:
� name of the timers “T_?????”
� states of the DL TBF? ACTIVE, DELAYED, RELEASED
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 112
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 112
5 Exercises
DL TBF Release Routine [cont.]
Back
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 113
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 113
Self-assessment on the Objectives
� Please be reminded to fill in the formSelf-Assessment on the Objectivesfor this module
� The form can be found in the first partof this course documentation
Section 1 � Module 2 � Page 114
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10864AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Resource management
1 � 2 � 114
End of ModuleRadio Resource management
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 1
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Do not delete this graphic elements in here:
1�3All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
Module 3Radio Link Control
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Section 1Radio Algorithms
EVOLIUME-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10
3FL11830ACAAWBZZA2 Issue 02
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 2
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 2
Blank Page
This page is left blank intentionally
First editionLast name, first nameYYYY-MM-DD01
RemarksAuthorDateEdition
Document History
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 3
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 3
Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
� Describe the algorithms of Radio Link Control and the related parameters
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 4
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 4
Module Objectives [cont.]
This page is left blank intentionally
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 5
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 5
Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!Page
1 GPRS CS Adaptation 72 EGPRS MCS Adaptation 223 RLC Blocks Retransmission 374 UL Power Control 465 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection 506 NC2 Cell Reselection 637 Flow Control at the Gb Interface 898 Radio Link Supervision 969 Exercises 106
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 6
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 6
Table of Contents [cont.]
Switch to notes view!Page
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 7
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 7
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 8
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 8
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
Introduction – GPRS and EGPRS
� The MFS decides the UL and DL changes of coding scheme
� CS adaptation is enabled by means of 2 parameters:
� EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK
� EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK
� These parameters apply to both GPRS and EGPRS TBFs
� GPRS
� 4 coding schemes: CS-1 to CS-4
� Only changes between consecutive CSs can occur
� Based on RXQUAL and I_LEVEL_TNi (interference level)
� EGPRS
� 9 modulation and coding schemes: MCS-1 to MCS-9
� Changes between any MCS can occur
� Based on MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP
CS-1: 20 useful bytes per RLC block.
CS-2: 30 useful bytes per RLC block.
CS-3: 36 useful bytes per RLC block.
CS-4: 50 useful bytes per RLC block.
MCS-1: 22 useful bytes per RLC block.
MCS-2: 28 useful bytes per RLC block.
MCS-3: 37 useful bytes per RLC block.
MCS-4: 44 useful bytes per RLC block.
MCS-5: 56 useful bytes per RLC block.
MCS-6: 74 useful bytes per RLC block.
MCS-7: 2x56 useful bytes per RLC block.
MCS-8: 2x68 useful bytes per RLC block.
MCS-9: 2x74 useful bytes per RLC block.
Only changes between consecutive CSs can occur, except in case of defense mechanism, see “Defense
procedure” slide.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 9
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 9
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
Principle
� The CS is adapted according to:
� QUALITY reporting
� I_LEVEL_TNi, only for DL TBF
� based on a comparison between the received level and the interference level
� BLER, only for DL TBF
� when I_LEVEL_TNi is not available
� for DL TBF:
� The MS makes measurements on all the received blocks on all the PDCHs
� The MS reports measurements in the “Packet DL Ack/Nack” messages
� Then, the MFS computes long term and short term averages
� for UL TBF:
� The BTS makes quality measurements on all TSs for each block sent by the MS
� Then the MFS computes long-term and short-term averages on all TSs
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 10
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 10
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
QUALITY Averaging in the MFS
� DL / UL TBF = 2 averages are computed:
� Short-term average AV_RXQUAL_ST
AV_RXQUAL_STn+1 = (1 - 1 / zn+1) * AV_RXQUAL_STn + (1 / zn+1) * RXQUALn,
with zn+1 = αST∆tn * zn + 1,
and αST = (1 - β)(1 / CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST)
� Long-term average AV_RXQUAL_LT
AV_RXQUAL_LTn+1 = (1 - 1 / yn+1) * AV_RXQUAL_LTn + (1 / yn+1) * RXQUALn,
with yn+1 = αLT∆tn * yn + 1,
and αLT = (1 - β)(1 / CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT)
In the formula above:
� RXQUALn is the RXQUAL value reported by the MS in the nth PACKET DL ACK/NACK message.
� ∆tn is the time difference in seconds between the (n-1)th and the nth PACKET DL ACK/NACK messages, therefore depending on DL_ACK_PERIOD parameter value, on the nb of PDCHs used by the MS and on the
traffic of the other MSs multiplexed on these PDCHs.
� AV_RXQUAL_STn (respectively AV_RXQUAL_LTn) is the value of AV_RXQUAL_ST (respectively
AV_RXQUAL_LT) after the nth PACKET DL ACK/NACK message.
� β is a hard coded end equal to 0.9.
Remark: the initial value of yn and zn is 0.
1/CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT and 1/CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST correspond to forgetting factors: number of seconds in the
past above which Quality measurements are considered as too old to be taken into account in the average.
Default values are:
� CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST = 0.32 s
� CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT = 2 s
both of them can be set at OMC-R level (cell level).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 11
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 11
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
AV_SIR Computation in the MFS
� Interference level averaged by the MS
� γCH,n = (1-d) * γCH,n-1 + d * SSCH,n� d is the forgetting factor = d = 1/ MIN(n, N_AVG_I)
� SSCH,n is the interference measurement at iteration n
� I_LEVEL_TNi computed by the MS and sent to the MFS
� I_LEVEL_TNi = 0 when γCH > C
� I_LEVEL_TNi = 1 when C-2dB < γCH <= C
� I_LEVEL_TNi = 2 when C-4dB < γCH <= C-2dB
� Etc.
� I_LEVEL_TNi = 14 when C-28dB < γCH <= C-26dB
� I_LEVEL_TNi = 15 when γCH <= C-28dB
� AV_SIR = average value of I_LEVEL_TNi of all assigned DL TS i
C_VALUE and I_LEVEL_TNi measurements are already averaged with an exponential filter in the MS.
Therefore, additional averaging is not needed, which reduces the complexity, i.e., AV_SIRn = I_LEVEL_TNin
where n is the number of the packet downlink Ack/Nack message.
Default values is :
� N_AVG_I: 6
� It Can be set at the OMC-R level (cell level).
For more details about measurements and averages performed by the MS, see 3GPP 05.08.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 12
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 12
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
DL CS Adaptation
O&M threshold
and hysteresis
new CS
current CS
- AV_RXQUAL_ST
- AV_RXQUAL_LT
- AV_SIR
MS MFS
(RXQUAL, I_Level_TNi)
Packet DL Ack/Nack
(RXQUAL, I_Level_TNi)
Packet DL Ack/Nack
Averaging
Link
adaptation
� Functional process
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 13
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 13
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
DL CS Adaptation [cont.]
� Threshold comparison when I_LEVEL_TNi are reported
� X = FH or NFH
� Y = ACK or NACK
AV_SIR < CS_SIR_DL_3_4_X_Y + CS_SIR_HST_DLNot possibleCS-4
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_DL_2_3_X_Y + CS_HST_DL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_DL_2_3_X_Y + CS_HST_DL_ST
AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_3_4_X_Y
AND
AV_SIR > CS_SIR_DL_3_4_X_Y
CS-3
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_X_Y + CS_HST_DL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_X_Y + CS_HST_DL_ST
AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_2_3_X_YCS-2
Not possibleAV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_X_YCS-1
Decreasing the coding scheme number
(CSi � CSi-1)
Increasing the coding scheme number
(CSi � CSi+1)
Current coding scheme
AV_RXQUAL_ST is a short term average whereas AV_RXQUAL_LT is a long term average. The short term
average is used to react quickly in case of fast degradation of the radio conditions.
X = FH or NFH: two thresholds are available for hopping and non-hopping TRXs.
Y = ACK or NACK: two thresholds are available for RLC acknowledged and unacknowledged modes.
The thresholds should be chosen so that: CS_HST_DL_ST > CS_HST_DL_LT > 0
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 14
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 14
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
DL CS Adaptation [cont.]
� Threshold comparison when I_LEVEL_TNi are NOT reported
� X = FH or NFH
� Y = ACK or NACK
CS4_BLER > CS_BLER_DL_4_3Not possibleCS-4
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_DL_2_3_X_Y + CS_HST_DL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_DL_2_3_X_Y + CS_HST_DL_ST
AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_3_4_X_Y
AND
CS3_BLER < CS_BLER_DL_3_4
CS-3
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_X_Y + CS_HST_DL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_X_Y + CS_HST_DL_ST
AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_2_3_X_YCS-2
Not possibleAV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_X_YCS-1
Decreasing the coding scheme number
(CSi � CSi-1)
Increasing the coding scheme number
(CSi � CSi+1)
Current coding scheme
As it has been observed (in the Alcatel labs during the B8 release validation) that some MSs do not report
any interference measurements when the BCCH carrier is included in the frequency hopping sequence of
the allocated PDCH, the algorithm described above is slightly modified in the MR2 version of the B8 release.
A new triggering condition is used for the CS change between CS3 and CS4. This new triggering condition
shall be applied only to the TBF that do not report any interference level measurements. Each time a
Packet DL Ack/Nack message is received:
� either it contains no interference measurement and the new algorithm is applied,
� or it contains interference measurements and the standard algorithm is applied.
With the new algorithm, the interference level is replaced by the BLER (RLC BLock Error Rate):
� the CS3 BLER is used for a CS change from CS3 to CS4,
� the CS4 BLER is used for a CS change from CS4 to CS3.
Remarks:
� Case of a DL TBF with PDCH allocated on the BCCH TRX and no frequency hopping on the BCCH TRX: the
MS does not report any interference level measurement in the Packet DL Ack/Nack message (no
interference measurement on the BCCH carrier).
� Case of a DL TBF with PDCH having the BCCH carrier belonging to the frequency hopping sequence:
depending on MS implementation, some MSs may not report any interference measurement (behavior
observed in the Alcatel labs during the B8 release validation).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 15
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 15
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
DL CS Adaptation [cont.]
� SummaryAV_RXQUAL_LT
AV_SIR
CS-1
CS-2
CS-3CS-4
CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_X_Y+ CS_HST_DL_LT
CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_X_Y
CS_QUAL_DL_2_3_X_Y
C S_QUAL_DL_3_4_X_Y
0
7
0 15CS_SIR_DL_3_4_X_Y CS_SIR_DL_3_4_X_Y +
CS_SIR_HST_DL
CS-1 or CS-2 (hysteresis)
CS-2 or CS-3 (hysteresis)
CS-3 or CS-4
(hysteresis)
CS_QUAL_DL_2_3_X_Y + CS_HST_DL_LT
BLER
100% 0%CS_BLER_DL_3_4 CS_BLER_DL_4_3
The change from CS-3 to CS-4 is not only based on AV_RXQUAL_LT for the two following reasons:
� RXQUAL range only goes down to 0.2%. However, the change of the coding scheme from CS-3 to CS-4 will
probably have to be done for even lower values. Indeed, when the coding scheme is CS-4, in static
(AWGN), a BLER of 0.1 (typical value of the BLER threshold to change from CS-3 to CS-4) is obtained for a
raw BER of 1-(1-0.1)1/456 = 2.10-4. This raw BER would be larger in multipath channels but is likely to
remain below 0.2%. This means that CS_QUAL_DL_3_4 should be close to 0 and that a condition based on
RXQUAL is not sufficient to change the coding scheme from CS-3 to CS-4.
� If the changes from CS-3 to CS-4 and from CS-4 to CS-3 are based on different metrics, a Ping-Pong effect
may occur. Indeed, it may happen that the conditions to change from CS-3 to CS-4 and CS-4 to CS-3 are
simultaneously true in some situations.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 16
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 16
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
UL CS Adaptation [cont.]
� Functional process
O&M threshold
and hysteresis
new CS
current CS
- AV_RXQUAL_ST
- AV_RXQUAL_LT
UL RLC block
Averaging
Link
adaptation
MS MFSBTS
RXQUAL
measurement
UL RLC block (RXQUAL)
UL RLC block (RXQUAL)
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 17
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 17
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
UL CS Adaptation [cont.]
� Threshold comparison
� X = FH or NFH
� Y = ACK or NACK
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_UL_3_4_X_Y + CS_HST_UL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_UL_3_4_X_Y + CS_HST_UL_ST
Not possibleCS-4
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_UL_2_3_X_Y + CS_HST_UL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_UL_2_3_X_Y + CS_HST_UL_ST
AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_UL_3_4_X_YCS-3
AV_RXQUAL_LT > CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_X_Y + CS_HST_UL_LT
OR
AV_RXQUAL_ST > CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_X_Y + CS_HST_UL_ST
AV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_UL_2_3_X_YCS-2
Not possibleAV_RXQUAL_LT < CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_X_YCS-1
Decreasing the coding scheme number
(CSi � CSi-1)
Increasing the coding scheme number
(CSi � CSi+1)
Current coding scheme
AV_RXQUAL_ST is a short term average whereas AV_RXQUAL_LT is a long term average. The short term
average is used to react quickly in case of fast degradation of the radio conditions.
X = FH or NFH: two thresholds are available for hopping and non-hopping TRXs.
Y = ACK or NACK: two thresholds are available for RLC acknowledged and unacknowledged modes.
The thresholds should be chosen so that: CS_HST_UL_ST > CS_HST_UL_LT > 0
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 18
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 18
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
UL CS Adaptation [cont.]
� SummaryAV_RXQUAL_LT
AV_SIR
CS1
CS2
CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_X_Y + CS_HST_UL_LT
CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_X_Y
CS_QUAL_UL_2_3_X_Y
0
7
0 15
CS1 or CS2 (hysteresis)
CS2 or CS3 (hysteresis)
CS3
CS4
CS3 or CS4 (hysteresis)CS_QUAL_UL_3_4_X_Y
CS_QUAL_UL_2_3_X_Y + CS_HST_UL_LT
CS_QUAL_UL_3_4_X_Y + CS_HST_UL_LT
In the uplink, the RXQUAL is available in CS-4 and the SIR measurements are not reported by the BTS to the
MFS so far. Therefore, it is also possible to use RXQUAL measurements to change the coding scheme from
CS-3 to CS-4 or from CS-4 to CS-3, contrary to the downlink algorithm, where the SIR was used.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 19
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 19
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
Execution
� UL TBF:
� the CS to be used is indicated to the MS during the establishment phase
� if a CS adaptation is decided by the MFS during the transfer phase, a PACKET UL ACK/NACK message is sent immediately to the MS
� DL TBF:
� if a CS adaptation is decided by the MFS during the transfer phase, the MFS modifies the CS
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 20
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 20
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
Defense Procedure
� In a DL TBF:
If the number of PACKET DL ACK/NACK messages consecutively lost from the MS on the radio interface goes over TBF_CS_DL, the coding scheme is changed to CS-1
� In a UL TBF:
If the number of radio blocks consecutively not decoded goes over the threshold Nb_allocated_TS x TBF_CS_UL, the coding scheme is changed to CS-1
� In both cases, the CS must not be changed again before TBF_CS_PERIOD RLC blocks are transmitted
B10
TBF_CS_DL = 8 (Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level.
TBF_CS_UL = 32 (Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level.
TBF_CS_PERIOD = 20 (Alcatel recommended value) and it cannot be set at OMC-R level.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 21
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 21
1 GPRS CS Adaptation
Initial Coding Scheme
� The initial CS at TBF establishment is given by the cell parameters:
� TBF_DL_INIT_CS for a DL TBF & TBF_UL_INIT_CS for a UL TBF
� Range = CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, CS-4
� Default value = CS-2
� T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport: the time period to request for a “Packet Downlink Ack/Nack” with measurements
� Range: from 60 to 3000 ms
� Default value = 400 ms
� The initial CS and CS changes are limited by the cell parameter MAX_GPRS_CS
� Range = CS-2, CS-3, CS-4
� Default value = CS-2
Exercise
Rules:
� TBF_DL_INIT_CS < MAX_GPRS_CS
� TBF_UL_INIT_CS < MAX_GPRS_CS
When a new LLC PDU is received and the downlink transfer is resumed, the timer defined by
CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD shall be checked. If it has not expired, then the coding scheme or modulation and
coding scheme of the previous DL TBF shall be re-used.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 22
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 22
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 23
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 23
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
Impact of the Output Power – DL Case
� The Average Power Decrease (APD)
� = max(0, modulation_delta_power - |BS_TXPWR_MAX|)
� Used in the MCS adaptation
TRE 1 TRE 2 TRE 3
353637383940414243444546474849
TRE 1 TRE 2 TRE 3
TR
E o
utp
ut p
ow
er (d
Bm
)
APD (dB)
8-PSK attenuation (dB)
8-PSK TRE power (dBm)
GMSK TRE power (dBm)
GMSK power in the cell (dBm)
Max GMSK power in the cell (dBm)
Max Power in the cell (dBm)
CAUTION: animated slide.
APD: Average Power Decrease
� The back-off between average GMSK and 8-PSK output power comes from physics since 8-PSK is a non-
constant envelope modulation unlike GMSK.
� As a consequence, power amplifiers can not be used at their maximum power. This results in a difference
between mean output powers for GMSK and 8-PSK modulations.
Output power handling
� The BTS sets all the TREs which transmit GMSK output powers at the same level which is the minimum
value among the maximum TRE output power in a sector and in a given band.
� On a TRE, the maximum GMSK output power is higher than the maximum 8-PSK output power.
� An O&M parameter (BS_TXPWR_MAX) allows a static power reduction of the maximum GMSK output power
of the sector.
� The TRE transmit power in 8-PSK shall not exceed the GMSK transmit power in the sector.
� The BTS determines for each TRE, the difference between the 8-PSK output power of the TRE and the
GMSK output power of the sector (8-PSK delta power).
� According to the 8-PSK delta power value, a TRE is called “High Power” or “Medium Power”.
� When a GCH channel is activated, the BTS sends the 8-PSK delta power to the MFS.
Together with BS_TXPWR_MAX (static power reduction), the 8-PSK delta power allows the MFS to
determine:
� a possible attenuation (BS_TX_PWR) for the 8-PSK DL RLC block emission, in order not to exceed the
GMSK power of the sector (for GMSK DL RLC block, the attenuation is BS_TXPWR_MAX).
� an Average Power Decrease which is the difference between the 8-PSK output power and the GMSK
output power after having taken into account BS_TXPWR_MAX. The Average Power Decrease is taken
into account in the link adaptation tables.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 24
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 24
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
Impact of the Output Power – UL Case
� The APD of a mobile station is the difference between the maximum output power in GMSK and the maximum output power in 8-PSK
� The maximum output powers are known by "GMSK Power Class" and "8-PSK Power Class" fields of the MS Radio Access capability
� Examples of APD in case of GSM 900 and GSM 850:
APD = 6APD = 2APD = 0GMSK: Power Class 5
Max. output power = 29 dBm
APD = 10APD = 6APD = 0GMSK: Power Class 4
Max. output power=33 dBm
APD = 10APD = 10APD = 4GMSK: Power Class 3
Max. output power = 37 dBm
APD = 10APD = 10APD = 6GMSK: Power Class 2
Max. output power = 39 dBm
8-PSK: Power Class E3
Max. output power = 23 dBm
8-PSK: Power Class E2
Max. output power = 27 dBm
8-PSK: Power Class E1
Max. output power=33 dBm
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 25
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 25
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
Measurement Reporting
� MEAN_BEP
� Average Bit Error Probability
� Range
� From 0 to 31
� MEAN_BEP = 0 means actual BEP > 25%
� MEAN_BEP = 31 means actual BEP < 0.025%
� CV_BEP
� Average coefficient of variation of the Bit Error Probability
� Range
� From 0 to 7
� CV_BEP = 0 means [1.75 < actual CV_BEP < 2.00]
� CV_BEP = 7 means [0.00 < actual CV_BEP < 0.25]
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 26
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 26
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
Measurement Reporting [cont.]
� The MCS is adapted according to MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP reporting (based on the Bit Error Probability)
� For a DL TBF:
� The MS makes MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP measurements on all the received blocks the header of which has been well decoded
� The MS computes MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP averages� Based on the forgetting factor principle
� The BEP_PERIOD cell parameter is used to compute the forgetting factor (default = 10)
� The MS reports MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP averages in the “EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack” messages
� For a UL TBF:
� The BTS makes MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP measurements on all the received blocks the header of which has been well decoded
For more details about MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP averages performed by the MS, refer to 3GPP 05.08.
Raw measurements on a radio block basis
� For EGPRS (that is during an EGPRS DL TBF), the MS shall calculate the following values, for each radio block (1 radio block = 4 bursts) addressed to it
(the DL TBF TFI contained in the radio block must be decoded):
� Mean Bit Error Probability (BEP) of a radio block:
� Coefficient of variation of the Bit Error Probability of a radio block:
� In the above equations, the BEP is measured on a burst basis by the MS before channel decoding.
Averaging of the raw measurements on a TS basis
� The raw measurements made by the MS on a radio block basis are averaged by the MS per TS (TN in the below equations) and per modulation type
(GMSK (MCS1 to MCS4), 8-PSK (MCS5 to MCS9)) as follows:
�
�
� with (Rn gives the reliability of the averaged quality parameters)
� In the above equations:
� n is the iteration index, incremented for each DL radio block,
� e is a forgetting factor and is calculated according to the BEP_PERIOD cell parameter,
SEE NEXT SLIDE
∑=
=4
14
1_
i
iburstblockBEPBEPMEAN
∑
∑ ∑
=
= =
−=
4
1
24
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
3
1
_
i
iburst
k i
iburstkburst
block
BEP
BEPBEP
BEPCV
nblock,n
n1n
n
nn MEAN_BEP
R
xeNMEAN_BEP_T)
R
xe(1NMEAN_BEP_T ⋅⋅+⋅⋅−= −
nblock,
n
n1n
n
nn CV_BEP
R
xeCV_BEP_TN)
R
xe(1CV_BEP_TN ⋅⋅+⋅⋅−= −
0R ,xeRe)(1R 1n1nn =⋅+⋅−= −−
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 27
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 27
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
DL MCS Adaptation
� Functional process
APD IR
link adapatation
tables
new MCS
current MCS
MS MFS
(Mean_BEP, CV_BEP)
EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack
Link
adaptation
Modulation
type
� xn denotes the existence of quality parameters for the nth block, i.e. if the radio block is intended for this MS. xn values 1 and
0 denote the existence and absence of quality parameters, respectively.
Measurements reporting
� An MS shall report the overall MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP (instead of reporting the RXQUAL and SIGN_VAR values) per modulation type
(that is GMSK_MEAN_BEP, GMSK_CV_BEP and/or 8-PSK_MEAN_BEP, 8-PSK_CV_BEP depending on the received blocks since the last
channel quality report sent to the network) averaged over all allocated channels (time slots) as follows:
� ,
� where n is the iteration index at reporting time and j the TS number.
� The MS reports the Mean_BEP and CV_BEP values to the MFS in the Channel Quality Report included in the EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack
and Packet Resource Request messages.
� The MS can report 32 different Mean_BEP values (MEAN_BEP_0 to MEAN_BEP_31). The mapping between the calculated Mean_BEP
value (linear scale) and the reported Mean_BEP value (logarithmic scale) depends on the used modulation (two mapping tables are
given in the 05.08 GSM recommendation: one for GMSK and one for 8-PSK).
� The MS can report 8 different CV_BEP values (CV_BEP_0 to CV_BEP_7). The mapping between the calculated and the reported values
is identical for the GMSK and 8-PSK modulations.
Measurements and reporting at BTS side
The BTS measures for each UL burst the BEP and calculates for each UL radio block (4 bursts) the Mean_BEP and the CV_BEP = Std_BEP
/ Mean_BEP. The Mean_BEP and the CV_BEP are reported on a radio block basis by the BTS to the MFS.
∑
∑ ⋅=
j
(j)
n
j
(j)
n
(j)
n
nR
NMEAN_BEP_TR
MEAN_BEP
∑
∑ ⋅=
j
(j)
n
j
(j)
n
(j)
n
nR
CV_BEP_TNR
CV_BEP
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 28
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 28
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
DL MCS Adaptation [cont.]
� In RLC acknowledged mode, the MFS applies a given MCS taking into account:
� Current MCS:
� MCS-1 to MCS-4 in GMSK
� MCS-5 to MCS-9 in 8-PSK
� Average Power Decrease: APD set = [0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10]
� MS OUT OF MEMORY state
� = Off then LA tables with IR are used
� = On then LA tables without IR (Type I ARQ) are used
� In RLC unacknowledged mode, the MFS applies a given MCS taking into account:
� Current MCS:
� MCS-1 to MCS-4 in GMSK
� MCS-5 to MCS-9 In 8-PSK
� Average Power Decrease: APD set = [0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10]
� Each combination of these criteria corresponds to a specific LA table
LA = Link Adaptation. IR = Incremental Redundancy, also called Type II ARQ (Automatic ReQuest for
repetition).
Extract of an LA table when APD=0dB, Type 1 ARQ, 8-PSK table: if the current MCS belongs to {5,6,7,8,9}
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1
1 5 5 5 5 1 1 2 2
2 5 5 5 5 1 2 2 2
3 5 5 5 5 2 2 2 3
4 5 5 5 5 5 2 3 3
5 5 5 5 5 5 3 3 3
6 5 5 6 5 5 5 3 3
7 5 5 6 5 5 5 3 3
8 5 5 6 6 5 5 5 4
9 5 6 6 6 5 5 5 5
10 5 6 6 6 6 5 5 5
11 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5
12 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5
13 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5
14 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
15 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
16 7 7 6 7 6 6 6 6
17 7 7 7 7 7 6 6 6
18 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
19 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
20 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
21 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
22 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
23 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
24 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
CV_BEP
ME
AN
_BE
P
�If the effective APD
(=max(0,
modulation_delta_power -
|BS_TX_PWR_Max|) does not
belong to the APD set which
is described above, then the
APD value in the set which is
immediately higher than the
received APD.
�e.g., if effective APD = 0.7
dB then APD = 1 dB
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 29
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 29
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
RLC ACK Mode: New DL MCS Value Determination
� Evaluated every “EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack” message
� If MCS indicated by LA tables <= current MCS
� Then New MCS = MCS indicated by LA tables
� Else New MCS = MCS indicated by LA tables with the modified criteria
� MEAN_BEP = max[(current MEAN_BEP)-2, 0]
� CV_BEP = current CV_BEP
Example:
� The TBF mode is acknowledged: use of the RLC acknowledged mode algorithm and tables,
� MS OUT OF MEMORY = On: use of the group of tables for Type I ARQ (without IR),
� APD = 0 dB: use of the group of tables for APD = 0 dB (for each APD value, there is a GMSK table (for MCS
= MCS1, … , MCS4) and a 8_PSK table (for MCS = MCS5, …, MCS9)),
� current MCS = MCS6: use of the 8_PSK table for APD = 0 dB.
� If the MS reports the (MEAN_BEP = 3, CV_BEP = 2) values in the last Packet DL Ack/Nack message, the link
adaptation table indicates MCS5. As MCS5 < MCS6, the commanded MCS is MCS5.
� If the MS reports the (MEAN_BEP = 23, CV_BEP = 3) values in the last Packet DL Ack/Nack message, the
link adaptation table indicates MCS8. As MCS8 > MCS6, the commanded MCS is the MCS corresponding to
the (MEAN_BEP = 23 – 2 = 21, CV_BEP = 3) couple in the link adaptation table, that is MCS7.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 30
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 30
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
RLC NACK Mode: New DL MCS Value Determination
� Evaluated every “EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack” message
� If MCS indicated by LA tables <= current MCS
� Then New MCS = MCS indicated by LA tables
� Else New MCS = MCS indicated by LA tables with the following criteria
� MEAN_BEP = max[(current MEAN_BEP)-8, 0]
� CV_BEP = current CV_BEP
� Exception: if � Current MEAN_BEP = 31
� AND Current CV_BEP = 7
� AND Current MCS belongs to {MCS-1, MCS-2, MCS-3, MCS-4)
� Then New MCS = MCS5
Exercise
The margin of 8 for the hysteresis has been chosen to have a long term average weighted BER close to
0.001. With this value, the MCS selected can never be higher than 7 in good radio conditions.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 31
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 31
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
UL MCS Adaptation
� Functional process
UL RLC b lock (CV_BEP, Mean_BEP)
new MCS
current MCS
UL RLC b lock
Averaging
Link
adaptation
MS MFS BTS
CV_BEP, Mean_BEP
computation
UL RLC b lock (CV_BEP, Mean_BEP)
lin k adapatation
tables
APD
The MFS calculates average values (Mean_BEP and CV_BEP) each time a radio block is received from the
BTS. Then the MFS checks if an MCS change is needed using internal tables. However, the first decision shall
only be taken when TBF_MCS_Period radio blocks have been received.
The measurements performed by the BTS are averaged by the MFS as follows:
� yn+1 = e∆tn * yn +1 where e (forgetting factor) is equal to (1 - 0.9)(1 / MCS_AVG_PERIOD),� Mean_BEPn+1 = (1 - 1 / yn+1) * Mean_BEPn + (1 / yn+1) * Mean_BEPblock n,
� CV_BEPn+1 = (1 - 1 / yn+1) * CV_BEPn + (1 / yn+1) * CV_BEPblock n
� MCS_AVG_PERIOD = 0,1s (Alcatel recommended value) and it cannot be set at OMC-R level.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 32
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 32
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
UL MCS Adaptation [cont.]
� In RLC acknowledged mode, the MFS applies a given MCS taking into account:
� Current MCS:
� MCS-1 to MCS-4 in GMSK
� MCS-5 to MCS-9 in 8-PSK
� APD of the MS: APD set = [0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10]
� EN_IR_UL state
� = enabled then LA tables with IR are used
� = disabled then LA tables without IR (Type I ARQ) are used
� In RLC unacknowledged mode, the MFS applies a given MCS taking into account:
� Current MCS:
� MCS-1 to MCS-4 in GMSK
� MCS-5 to MCS-9 In 8-PSK
� Average Power Decrease: APD set = [0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10]
� Each combination of those criteria corresponds to a specific LA table
Modified B10
The same tables apply in the uplink as in the downlink.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 33
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 33
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
RLC ACK Mode: New UL MCS Value Determination
� Evaluated every 12 radio blocks (decision window)
� For each radio block, the MFS computes an indicated MCS (MCSind)according to MEAN_BEP, CV_BEP and the appropriate LA table
� During the decision window:
� If MCSind > current MCS then N_sup = N_sup + 1
� If MCSind <= current MCS then N_inf = N_inf + 1
� At the end of the decision window:
� If N_inf > 6 and MCSindlast_block < current MCS
� Then New MCS = MCSindlast_block
� Else if N_sup > 6 and MCSindlast_block > current MCS
� Then New MCS = Max[current MCS, MCSindlast_block modified]� Where MCSindlast_block modified is computed with the following criteria
� MEAN_BEP = Max[MEAN_BEPlast_block-2, 0]
� CV_BEP = CV_BEPlast_block
� Else, New MCS = current MCS
The following complex algorithm is used by the MFS to determine the MCS to be used in RLC acknowledged
mode:
� the MFS determines the MCS to be used every 12 radio blocks (decision window),
� during the decision window, for each received measurement (that is for each received radio block), the
averaged (Mean_BEP, CV_BEP) couple indicates a best MCS (called MCSind) according to the appropriate link
adaptation table. This best MCS is compared to the current MCS, and 2 counters (N_sup, N_inf) are
maintained (N_sup (respectively N_inf), is incremented by one when MCSind is higher (respectively lower)
than the current MCS) that gives, for the current decision window, the number of MCSind that are higher or
equal to the current MCS,
� at the end of the decision window, the decision process is as follows:
� the new MCS is determined according to the trend observed during the decision window (that is
trend towards upper MCS or trend towards lower MCS). It is considered that a trend towards upper
(respectively lower) MCS is observed if strictly more than half (that is 6) of the MCSind are higher
(respectively lower) than the current MCS,
� moreover, the new MCS is applied only if the last MCSind of the decision window corresponds to the
trend observed during the decision window (that is MCSindlast block > current MCS for a trend
towards upper MCS or MCSindlast block < current MCS for a trend towards lower MCS),
� finally, the new MCS is the MCSind of the last block (MCSindlast block) in case of trend towards a
lower MCS. In case of trend towards upper MCS, an hysteresis is applied on the measurements as the
new MCS in that case is equal to max(current MCS, MCSindlast block (max(Mean_BEP - 2, 0),
CV_BEP)).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 34
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 34
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
RLC NACK Mode: New UL MCS Value Determination
� Evaluated every 12 radio blocks (decision window)
� If MCSindlast_block <= current MCS
� Then New MCS = MCSindlast_block
� Else
� Then New MCS = Max[current MCS, MCSindlast_block modified]� Where MCSindlast_block modified is computed with the following criteria
� MEAN_BEP = Max[MEAN_BEPlast_block-8, 0]
� CV_BEP = CV_BEPlast_block
Exercise
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 35
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 35
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
Defense Procedure
� In a DL TBF:
If the number of EGPRS PACKET DL ACK/NACK messages consecutively lost from the MS on the radio interface goes over TBF_MCS_DL, the modulation and coding scheme are changed to MCS-1
� In a UL TBF:
If the number of radio blocks consecutively not decoded goes over the threshold Nb_allocated_TS x TBF_MCS_UL, the modulation and coding scheme are changed to MCS-1
� In both cases, the MCS must not be changed again before TBF_MCS_PERIOD RLC blocks are transmitted
TBF_MCS_DL = 12 (Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level.
TBF_MCS_UL = 32 (Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level.
TBF_MCS_PERIOD = 12 (Alcatel recommended value) and it cannot be set at OMC-R level.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 36
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 36
2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation
Initial MCS
� The initial MCS at TBF establishment is given by the cell parameters:
� TBF_DL_INIT_MCS for a DL TBF & TBF_UL_INIT_MCS for a UL TBF
� Range for a DL TBF = from MCS-1 to MCS-9
� Range for a UL TBF = from MCS-1 to MCS-9
� Default value = MCS-3
� T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport: the time period to request for a “EGPRS Packet Downlink Ack/Nack” with measurements
� Values: from 60 to 3000 ms
� Default value = 200 ms
� The initial MCS and MCS changes are limited by the cell parameter MAX_EGPRS_MCS
� Range = from MCS-2 to MCS-9
� Default value = MCS-9
Rules:
� TBF_DL_INIT_MCS < MAX_EGPRS_MCS
� TBF_UL_INIT_MCS < MAX_EGPRS_MCS
When a new LLC PDU is received and the downlink transfer is resumed, the timer defined by
CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD shall be checked. If it has not expired, then the coding scheme or modulation and
coding scheme of the previous DL TBF shall be re-used.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 37
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 37
3 RLC Blocks Retransmission
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 38
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 38
3 RLC Blocks Retransmission
New Modulation and Coding Schemes
� Data rate per radio TS (RLC payload)
Scheme Modulation Maximum rate (kbps)
GPRS
CS-4 GMSK 20
CS-3 GMSK 14.4
CS-2 GMSK 12
CS-1 GMSK 8
EGPRS
MCS-9 8PSK 59.2
MCS-8 8PSK 54.4
MCS-7 8PSK 44.8
MCS-6 8PSK 29.6 / 27.2 *
MCS-5 8PSK 22.4
MCS-4 GMSK 17.6
MCS-3 GMSK 14.8 / 13.6 *
MCS-2 GMSK 11.2
MCS-1 GMSK 8.8
* case of padding
8-PSK modulation
to provide
higher data rates
GMSK modulation to
ensure a certain level of
performance in case of
poor radio conditions
MCSs are defined only for the EGPRS packet data traffic channels (PDTCH). For all the EGPRS packet control
channels, the corresponding GPRS control channel coding is used (that is CS1 for the PACCH, PBCCH,
PAGCH, PPCH and downlink PTCCH).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 39
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 39
3 RLC Blocks Retransmission
New Modulation and Coding Schemes [cont.]
� MCSs are divided into 4 families: A, A padding, B and C
MCS-5 MCS-6 MCS-7 MCS-8 MCS-9MCS-1 MCS-2 MCS-3 MCS-4
FamilyC
FamilyB
FamilyA
padding
FamilyA
28
22
34+3
22 22
28 28
34+3 34+3
28 28
28 28
34 34
34 34
37 37 37 37 37
37 37
GMSK 8-PSK
28RLC data block Unit of payload (in
bytes)
Radio data
block
The main GPRS imperfections are linked to:
� the design of the GPRS coding schemes which were designed independently from the others with their
own data unit.
� the fact that once the information contained in a radio block has been transmitted with a certain CS, it is
not possible via the Automatic ReQuest for repetition (ARQ) mechanism to retransmit with another CS.
� This could lead to the release of the TBF and to the establishment of a new one in order to transmit
the LLC frame.
EGPRS coding schemes have been designed to offset this problem. Four MCS families have been created
with for each of them a basic unit of payload.
� This allows the re-segmentation of the RLC data blocks when changing of modulation and coding schemes
(within the same family).
� Example: if one MCS-6 radio block has not been received correctly by the receiver and if radio
conditions have degraded in the meantime, it is possible to re-send the same information in two
radio blocks with MCS-3 (more protection).
� The level of protection applied (MCS usage) in case of retransmissions is in line with the radio conditions.
The different code rates within a family are achieved by transmitting a different number of payload units
within one radio block.
When 4 payload units are transmitted, these are split into 2 separate RLC blocks (i.e., with separate
sequence numbers).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 40
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 40
3 RLC Blocks Retransmission
Automatic ReQuest for Repetition (ARQ)
� In RLC ACK mode, the retransmission can be performed using:
� Selective type I ARQ mechanism
� The blocks which are not decoded are simply retransmitted
� Available since B6 release
� Another MCS from the same family can be used
� Type II hybrid ARQ mechanism (also called Incremental Redundancy (IR))
� The blocks which are not decoded are retransmitted� Using or not another MCS of the same family
� Using a different Puncturing Scheme (PS)
� The non decoded block and the retransmitted one(s) are “soft combined” to retrieve the right information
� This applies only when the MS memory for IR is not full
� This can apply for both UL and DL EGPRS TBF
Appendix
The type 2 ARQ mechanism or incremental redundancy (IR) is an ETSI function, mandatory for the EGPRS MS
receiver (downlink path) and optional for the BTS receiver (uplink path).
The incremental redundancy is not used for the signaling blocks, the GPRS data blocks and the data blocks
in RLC unacknowledged mode. It is only used for the EGPRS data blocks in RLC acknowledged mode.
In the type II ARQ mechanism (IR):
� the first emission of an RLC data block is done using a first puncturing scheme (PS1),
� in case of re-transmission of this RLC block, the transmitter uses the same MCS or an MCS of the same
family as the one used for the initial block. The re-segmentation of the RLC block may be performed or not,
� at the output of the demodulator, the receiver combines the information of soft bits corresponding to the
first transmission of the block and its different re-transmissions, thus increasing the decoding probability of
the RLC block.
� Remark: according to the 04.60 (RLC/MAC layers) GSM recommendation, the soft combining inside the MS
receiver is only performed between:
� an MCSx block and an MCSx block (that is the same MCS is used for the re-transmission),
� an MCS9 block and an MCS6 block (in that case the RLC data blocks carry the same number of
payload units),
� an MCS7 block and an MCS5 block (in that case the RLC data blocks carry the same number of
payload units).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 41
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 41
3 RLC Blocks Retransmission
Type I ARQ Mechanism
� MCS selection for retransmission of a DL or UL RLC data block
Commanded MCS (given by the link adaptation algorithm)
MCS9 MCS8 MCS7 MCS6 MCS5 MCS4 MCS3 MCS2 MCS1
MCS9 MCS9 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3
MCS8 MCS8 MCS8 MCS6 (pad.)
MCS6 (pad.)
MCS3 (pad.)
MCS3 (pad.)
MCS3 (pad.)
MCS3 (pad.)
MCS3 (pad.)
MCS7 MCS7 MCS7 MCS7 MCS5 MCS5 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2
MCS6 MCS9 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3
MCS5 MCS7 MCS7 MCS7 MCS5 MCS5 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2
MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1
MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3
MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2
Initial MCS
MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1
With the type 1 ARQ mechanism, the decoding of a re-transmitted RLC block does not use the previously
transmitted versions (not correctly received) of this RLC block. The decoding of an RLC data block is only
based on the current transmission.
The type 1 ARQ mechanism is always used for the GPRS.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 42
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 42
3 RLC Blocks Retransmission
Type I ARQ Mechanism [cont.]
� Example of a UL EGPRS TBFMS BSS
UL RLC data block B1, MCS4, PS1
Packet UL Ack/Nack (B1 not decoded)
UL RLC data block first part B1, MCS1, PS1
UL RLC data block second part B1, MCS1, PS1
B1 block not decoded by the BTS
Resegment bit set
Second part of B1 block not decoded by the BTS
Packet UL Ack/Nack (B1 not decoded)Resegment bit set
UL RLC data block first part B1, MCS1
UL RLC data block second part B1, MCS1
MS BSS
UL RLC data block B1, MCS4, PS1
Packet UL Ack/Nack (B1 not decoded)
UL RLC data block first part B1, MCS1, PS1
UL RLC data block second part B1, MCS1, PS1
B1 block not decoded by the BTS
Resegment bit set
Second part of B1 block not decoded by the BTS
Packet UL Ack/Nack (B1 not decoded)Resegment bit set
UL RLC data block first part B1, MCS1
UL RLC data block second part B1, MCS1
, PS1
, PS1
The picture above shows the case of a UL EGPRS TBF where one block is not decoded by the BTS and is then
re-transmitted by the MS with a lower MCS in the same MCS family. In this example, the second part of the
re-transmitted block is not correctly decoded by the BTS. As it is not possible to indicate separately in the
Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message whether the first part of the block or the second part has been decoded,
if one part is not received the MS will retransmit again the two parts of the block.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 43
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 43
3 RLC Blocks Retransmission
Type II ARQ Mechanism
� The MCS used to re-transmit a DL RLC data block depends on:
� The initial MCS used to send this RLC data block
� The resegmentation allowed or not
� The DL resegmentation is allowed If EN_FULL_IR_DL = disabled
� The UL resegmentation is allowed If EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL= enabled
� The possible memory shortage in the MS (case of a DL EGPRS TBF)
� MS OUT OF MEMORY = On, in the EGPRS packet DL Ack/Nack message
� The MCS commanded by the link adaptation algorithm (refer to session 2 EGPRS MCS Adaptation)
� As IR is optional in UL, the feature can be enabled/disabled using the Cell parameter EN_IR_UL
Modified B10
Modified B10
B10
Modified B10
The TRX manages the IR UL. Indeed, the TRX decodes the RLC/MAC header of all the UL RLC/MAC data
blocks received on each PDCH to know which TBF the RLC data block(s) pertain.
For each TBF, the maximum number of different RLC data blocks stored is equal to the window size which
depends on the maximum number of RTSs used in uplink (512 for 4 TS).
The TRX is able to store 4,000 RLC data blocks which have not been correctly decoded. If an RLC data block
is received with the same PS as an already received RLC data block belonging to the same TBF, only the last
instance is taken into account.
EN_FULL_IR_DL, parameter changed from BSS level in B9 to Cell Level in B10.
EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL, parameter changed from BSS level in B9 to Cell Level in B10.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 44
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 44
3 RLC Blocks Retransmission
Type II ARQ Mechanism [cont.]
� The following table is used to select the MCS if
� In DL, EN_FULL_IR DL = enabled and MS OUT OF MEMORY = off
� In UL, EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL = disabled
� In all the other cases, the table used for Type I ARQ is applied
Commanded MCS (given by the link adaptation algorithm)
MCS9 MCS8 MCS7 MCS6 MCS5 MCS4 MCS3 MCS2 MCS1
MCS9 MCS9 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6
MCS8 MCS8 MCS8 MCS6 (pad.)
MCS6 (pad.)
MCS6 (pad.)
MCS6 (pad.)
MCS6 (pad.)
MCS6 (pad.)
MCS6 (pad.)
MCS7 MCS7 MCS7 MCS7 MCS5 MCS5 MCS5 MCS5 MCS5 MCS5
MCS6 MCS9 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 MCS6
MCS5 MCS7 MCS7 MCS7 MCS5 MCS5 MCS5 MCS5 MCS5 MCS5
MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4 MCS4
MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3 MCS3
MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 MCS2
Initial MCS
MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1 MCS1
WITHOUT
RESEGMENTATION
B10
“In all the other cases” means:
� In DL, EN_FULL_IR_DL=disabled or MS OUT OF MEMORY=on.
� In UL, EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL=disabled.
EN_FULL_IR_DL, parameter changed from BSS level in B9 to Cell Level in B10.
EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL, parameter changed from BSS level in B9 to Cell Level in B10.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 45
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 45
3 RLC Blocks Retransmission
Type II ARQ Mechanism [cont.]
� The PS used to re-transmit an RLC data block depends on:
� If the selected MCS has not changed then
� The PS is changed in a cyclic way: PS1, PS2, PS3, PS1, etc.
� Else, the PS to be used is indicated in the table below:
� PS1 is used in case of the first transmission of an RLC data block
Exercise
Previous MCS New MCS Previous PS New PS
PS1 or PS3 PS1 MCS9 MCS6
PS2 PS2
PS1 PS3 MCS6 MCS9
PS2 PS2
MCS7 MCS5 Any PS1
MCS5 MCS7 Any PS2
All other combinations Any PS1
If the selected MCS has not changed: if all the different punctured versions of the data block have been
sent, the procedure shall start over and PS1 shall be used, followed by PS2, then by PS3 (if available for the
considered MCS), so that the PS selection is cyclic.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 46
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 46
4 UL Power Control
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 47
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 47
4 UL Power Control
Measurements
� The MS makes level measurements defined by the 05.08 GSM recommendation:
� in Packet Idle Mode:
� BCCH of the serving cell (paging blocks monitored by the MS);
� if MPDCH established, measurement on PCCCH = received signal on each paging block monitored, according to its DRX mode and paging group
� in Packet Transfer Mode:
� behavior defined by the parameter PC_MEAS_CHAN broadcast on the PBCCH (PSI1)� PBCCH of the serving cell (or BCCH if no MPDCH)
� on all the blocks of the PDCH carrying the PACCH
The MS uses DL level measurements to determine the power: open loop PC.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 48
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 48
4 UL Power Control
Averaging
� Cn = a * (SSn + Pb) + (1-a) * Cn-1� a is the forgetting factor:
� Packet Idle Mode: 1 / min(n, max(5, T_AVG_W / TDRX))� TDRX = BS_PA_MFRMS (number of 51 multi-frame between 2 paging)
� Packet Transfer Mode: 1/ (6 * T_AVG_T) (BCCH)or 1/ (12 * T_AVG_T) (PDCH)
� SSn is the measurement at iteration n:
� average level of block n in Packet Idle Mode and Packet Transfer Mode (PDCH)
� level of the sample in Packet Transfer Mode (BCCH)
� Pb is a correcting factor relating to the power reduction value applied by the BTS on a PCCCH and/or PDCH, to be compared with the output power used on the BCCH
Use of a recursive filtering to obtain an average level.
Average levels calculated in Packet Idle Mode used in Packet Transfer Mode and vice versa: a proper
average level is available at the beginning of the transfer
The respective values of the T_AVG_T and T_AVG_W averaging windows are broadcast on PSI1.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 49
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 49
4 UL Power Control
MS Power
� The MS uses the same power during a radio block (4 bursts)
� MS power = min(Γ0 - Γch - α * (C + 48), Pmax)
� Γ0 = 39 dBm in GSM 900, 36 dBm in GSM 1800� α and Γch are sent to the MS (α: SI 13, α and Γch: Packet UL and DL assignment) and are tuned in order to obtain a given behavior
� Pmax is the maximum transmitted power, and is equal to:
� GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH if there is a PBCCH
� MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH otherwise
� C is the average DL level calculated by the MS
The MS power access on an RACH can be MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH. In fact, the MS will use the first of the 2
values listened on the cell broadcast information.
The 05.08 GSM recommendation suggests to:
� use α = 1
� tune Γch in order to reach a given UL level (LEVUL) at the BTS side: Γch = Γ0 - 48 - LEVUL - PBTS (PBTS: BTS power)
� explanation:
� Pm = Γ0 - Γch - α * (C + 48)
� Pm = LEVUL - LEVDL + PBTS
� When you fix α=1, you get a specific value for Γch, which is not usable for any value of α.� Proceed by dichotomy to find the proper value of Γch
Another possibility:
� if path balance: PBTS - Pm = Sm - SBTS (S: sensitivity)
� therefore: LEVDL - LEVUL = Sm - SBTS
� and Pm = Γ0 - Γch - α * (LEVUL + Sm - SBTS + 48)
� example with G3 BTS: Pm = Γ0 - Γch - α * (LEVUL + 57)
� possibility of tuning:
� power reduction when the UL level is higher than U_RXLEV_UL_P
� MS power not lower than 13/4 dBm in GSM 900/1800
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 50
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 50
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 51
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 51
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
Introduction
� 2 kinds of selection – reselection are implemented in the Alcatel-LucentBSS:
� NC0
� The MS performs autonomous cell reselection
� All the algorithms (criteria computation, triggering, target cell choice) are implemented in the MS
� No measurement reporting
� NC2
� The network (MFS) controls the cell reselection
� All the algorithms (criteria computation, triggering, target cell choice) are implemented in the MFS
� The MS sends periodically measurement reports
� The main important parameters involved in the cell selection andreselection are broadcast in PSI3 & PSI3bis (if PBCCH) or in SI3 (if BCCH).
� The GPRS neighboring cells list is identical to the GSM one
Further details concerning Cell selection and Cell reselection in case of PBCCH in the appendix.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 52
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 52
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
Principles
� Procedures defined in the 05.08 GSM recommendation
� Cell selection:
� made using the C1 criterion as for GSM
� Cell reselection:
� made using the C1 and C2 criteria as for GSM in the serving cell
In GSM
C1 = A - Max (0,B) with:
� A = RLA_C - RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
� B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH - MS_TXPWR_MAX + POWER_OFFSET(1800)
C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET - TEMPORARY_OFFSET(T) when Penalty_time<31
C2 = C1 - CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET when Penalty_Time=31
In GPRS ready and standby states, cell reselection is performed by the MS except for a class A MS while in
dedicated mode of a circuit-switched connection, in which case the cell is determined by the network
according to the handover procedures.
For a class B MS which can combine GSM and GPRS states, C1 criterion is used when the MS simultaneously
attached to both the network and the MS is in Packet Idle Mode (refer to GSM 05.08).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 53
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 53
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
Selection
� Criteria computation:
� Without PBCCH
� C1 = (RLA_C – RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) – max (0, MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCCH – P)
� RLA_C: average DL level received
� Cell choice: the best cell is the cell with the highest C1
C1 is the same as in GSM except that:
� A = RLA_P – GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: “listening capacity of MS in the cell”
� B = GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH – P: “talking capacity of MS in the cell”
� C1 shall be positive and as high as possible
In Packet Idle Mode, the MS shall make one measurement for each BCCH carrier monitored every 4 seconds,
as well as more than one sample per second for each BCCH carrier.
A list of 6 strongest cells shall be kept updated at a rate of at least one update per running average period.
In Packet Transfer Mode, the MS shall monitor a list of 6 strongest non-serving cell BCCH carriers. It shall
attempt to check the BSIC for each of these 6 strongest cells at least once every 10 seconds.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 54
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 54
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
Reselection Criteria Computation Without PBCCH
� If CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND=not present then C2=C1 else:
� C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET - TEMPORARY_OFFSET(T)(if PENALTY_TIME <> 31)
� if T > PENALTY_TIME, TEMPORARY_OFFSET(T)=0
� used to avoid locating on “transient cell”
� CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET used to favor a cell among others (e.g., micro-cell vs. umbrella, once T > PENALTY_TIME)
� C2 = C1 - CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(if PENALTY_TIME = 31)
� CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET used to handicap some cells among others
The same algorithm is used in case the MS is in GSM Idle Mode.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 55
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 55
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
Target Cell Choice Without PBCCH
� The MS triggers a cell reselection if:
� C1(serving) <0
and/or
� In Standby Mode
� C2(neighbor) > C2(serving) if cells belong to a same RA
� C2(neighbor) > C2(serving)+CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS if cells from different RAs
� In Ready Mode
� C2(neighbor) > C2(serving)+CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS even if cells belong to a same RA
� Cell choice: the best cell is the cell with the highest C2
The normal procedures apply in case of Cell reselection for a DTM capable MS in PTM.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 56
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 56
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
Reselection During a UL TBF
� UL TBF:
� MFS: after a cell reselection, the MFS receives no more data in the UL blocks allocated to the MS => TBF release
� MS: in the new cell, after the SI messages acquisition, a new UL TBF is established
� SGSN: the SGSN is informed of the cell change when receiving an LLC unit from the MS in the new cell. Then the SGSN notifies the BSS about the cell change (FLUSH PDU)
After a TBF release, it is up to the originator to reinitiate the transfer: the MS in the UL, the SGSN in the
DL.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 57
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 57
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
Reselection During a UL TBF [cont.]
SGSNCell Reselection
?
FLUSH LLMFS
CAUTION: animated slide.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 58
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 58
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
Reselection During a DL TBF
� DL TBF:
� MFS: after a cell reselection, the MFS receives no more acknowledgements from the MS => abnormal TBF release
� MS: in the new cell, after the SI messages acquisition, a UL TBF is established to send a cell update to the SGSN (MS in Ready state)
� SGSN: when the SGSN is informed of a cell change it sends a message to the MFS to discard LLC units stored for the MS in the old cell (FLUSH PDU)
� The SGSN resumes the DL transfer by sending a DL LLC unit => DL TBF establishment in the new cell
After a TBF release, it is up to the originator to reinitiate the transfer: the MS in the UL, the SGSN in the
DL.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 59
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 59
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
Reselection During a DL Transfer: Example
Cell update (new BVCI)SGSN aware of the cell reselection
MFS « aware » of a radio problem
MFS aware of the cell reselection
Exercise
MFS: after a cell reselection, the MFS receives no more acknowledgement from the MS ⇒ TBF release.
MS: in the new cell, after the SI messages acquisition, a UL TBF is established to send a cell update to the
SGSN (MS in Ready state).
SGSN: when the SGSN is informed of a cell change, it sends a message to the MFS to discard LLC units stored
for the MS in the old cell. The SGSN resumes the DL transfer by sending a DL LLC unit ⇒ DL TBF estab in the
new cell.
The MFS is always aware of a successful cell change afterwards, upon reception of the flush LL message
from the SGSN.
If the cell change is unsuccessful, the TBF release is counted as abnormal.
DL_UDT = DL user data
RAD_STATUS = radio status message sent by the MFS to the SGSN (BSSGP signaling).
FLUSH_LL = BSSGP message sent by the SGSN to the MFS to notify a successful change of cell by the MS.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 60
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 60
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
NACC and (P)SI Status
� 2 features are available to reduce the duration of the reselection
� NACC: Network Assisted Cell Change
� If EN_NACC = enabled then� before the cell reselection,
� in the serving cell,
� the network sends to the MS a part of the SI messages of the new cell
� (P)SI Status: (Packet) System Info Status
� If EN_PSI_STATUS = enabled then
� after the transfer resumption,
� in the target cell,
� the MS can ask the network to send it:
� the remaining PSI messages if PBCCH is present
� the remaining SI messages otherwise
B10
The NACC procedure is a new feature standardized in Release 4, mandatory for Release 4 onwards mobile
stations supporting GERAN Feature Package 1.
The Packet PSI Status procedure is a feature standardized from Release 97 onwards, optional for Release
97, Release 98 and Release 99 MS, and mandatory for Release 4 onwards MS supporting GERAN Feature
Package 1.
The Packet SI Status procedure is a new feature standardized in Release 4, mandatory for Release 4
onwards mobile stations supporting GERAN Feature Package 1.
NACC and (P)SI Status features are supported only if:
� The MS is neither in dedicated mode nor Dual Transfer Mode
� The MS is in NCO or NC1 mode
� The MS is in Packet Transfer Mode.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 61
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 61
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
NACC and (P)SI Status [cont.]
� NACC
� The MS informs the system that it wants to select a neighboring cell
� The BSS transmits the partial SI of the neighboring cell
MSMFSCell A
UL or DL TBF
Packet Cell Change Notification
Retrieval of SI
instances
Packet Neighbor Cell Data (SI1)
Packet Neighbor Cell Data (SI3)
Packet Neighbor Cell Data (SI13)
Packet Cell Change Continue
MFSCell B
When the MS detects a need of cell reselection in transfer mode, it sends a "Packet Cell Change
Notification" message to the MFS (on PACCH):
� If the MFS knows the (P)SI of the target cell:
� If there is no PBCCH in the target cell, it sends SI1, SI3, SI13 in (several) "Packet Neighbor Cell Data"
messages, followed by a "Packet Cell Change Continue" message.
� If there is a PBCCH in the target cell, it sends PSI1, PSI2, PSI14 in (several) "Packet Neighbor Cell
Data" messages, followed by a "Packet Cell Change Continue" message.
� If the MFS does not know the (P)SI of the target cell, it sends only a "Packet Cell Change Continue"
message.
If no PBCCH is present, the BSC sends SI1, SI3, SI13 messages to the MFS in a "System Information Update"
message.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 62
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 62
5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
NACC and (P)SI Status [cont.]
� SI Status
� The MS has resumed the data transfer in the neighboring cell
� Then, it asks the system to retrieve the missing Sys-info
� This mechanism is applied in both NC0 and NC2
MSMFSCell A
MFSCell B
Packet SI Status (SI2, SI2bis, SI2ter msg type missing)
Packet Serving Cell Data (SI2)
Packet Serving Cell Data (SI2bis)
Packet Serving Cell Data (SI2ter)
UL or DL TBF
UL or DL TBF
When accessing a new cell, the MS must get SI13, SI3, SI1, or PSI1 and PSI2 (if not already known through
NACC).
If the Packet (P)SI Status is offered in the cell, it can start PTM and send:
� a "Packet SI Status" message (when there is no PBCCH), with the list of missing SI messages.
� a "Packet PSI Status" message (when there is a PBCCH), with the list of missing PSI messages.
The MFS shall then send:
� the SI instances required by the MS (the MS is the only addressee) in one or several "Packet Serving Cell
Data" messages in case there is no PBCCH in the target cell.
� the PSI instances required by the MS (all MSs listening to this PDCH will get the information) directly on a
PACCH in case a PBCCH is present in the target cell.
The MS can request updated (P)SI instances whenever it wants, provided it is in PTM.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 63
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 63
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 64
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 64
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
Aim
� Impact of reselection on data transfer
� NC2 aims at reducing the number of cell reselections triggered whenthe MS is in Packet Transfer Mode
� The lower the number of cell reselections, the better the end-user QoS
Data
Transfer
: TBF establishment
: TBF release due to cell reselection
: Reselection
1 2 3
1
23
4
4
Each time the MS performs a cell reselection, the data transfer is interrupted and a retransmission of some
LLC PDUs may be required:
� The on-going TBF is released in the old cell.
� The MS performs the PSI or SI acquisition in the new cell.
� Then, the MS establishes a new UL TBF in this cell to send a Cell Update message to the SGSN.
� The MFS deletes or reroutes towards the new cell the LLC PDUs stored in the old cell.
� if they are deleted, a retransmission is needed.
� Finally, the data transfer is re-started (after a DL TBF establishment, in case of DL transfer).
All these steps degrade the data throughput or the page access time perceived by the end user.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 65
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 65
�The NC2 process for PS is similar to the HO process for CS
� HO
� NC2
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
Functional Entities
RadioLink Measurements
ActiveChannelPre-processing
HO DetectionHO CandidateCell Evaluation
HO management
HO Preparation
MS - BTS BSC
MS - BTS MFS
NC cell Reselectionactivation
NC measurementReporting andprocessing
NC cellReselection Detection
NC cell ReselectionEvaluation
NC cell Reselectionmanagement
NC cell reselection Preparation
The RRM layer is in charge of the measurement processing. It is also in charge of the selection of the target
cell, as it is the layer having the knowledge of the network topology and parameters. The RRM layer is
actually in charge of managing the overall NC cell reselection procedure.
The RLC layer is in charge of forwarding the packet measurements to the RRM layer. Finally, the RLC layer
is in charge of the RXLEV and RXQUAL measurements processing (per TBF) and of the corresponding NC cell
reselection detection.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 66
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 66
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Activation / De-activation
� Activation
� NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER has 3 possible values:
� NC0 mode of operation for all MSs
� NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MSs
� NC2 mode of operation for all MSs
� NC2 cell reselection can be used only when the MS is in READY state, otherwise NC0 is used
� De-activation
� NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE has 2 possible values:
� NC2 deactivation at the end of the packet transfer
� NC2 deactivation at T_READY (GMM Ready timer) expiry
� In case of Dual Transfer Mode, Cell Reselection will be ignored by the MS
B10
NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is a cell parameter tunable at OMC-R level.
The R97 and R98 MSs are differentiated from the other MSs. Indeed, all the MSs shall support the NC2 mode,
however since no network manufacturer has implemented the NC2 mode, the R97 and R98 MSs may not
have been sufficiently tested and therefore there is a risk of interoperability with these MSs.
The “Packet Measurement Order” message is used to activate and de-activate the NC2 mode of operation
for a given MS.
� Activation
� The “Packet Measurement Order (NC2)” message is sent when:
� establishing the first Downlink TBF of the Packet Transfer Mode or when re-establishing the DL
TBF while T3192 is running and there is not any on-going UL TBF.
� no measurement report has already been received for that MS during its on-going packet
transfer(s) (UL and/or DL).
� the MS has not been forced to operate in NC2 mode by a Packet Cell Change Order message
(during an intra-RA cell reselection).
� De-activation
� The “Packet Measurement Order (RESET)” message is sent at the end of the data transfer, in case of
NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE = “NC2 deactivation at the end of the packet transfer”.
� When the MS goes back to the STANDBY state, in case of NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE = “NC2
deactivation at GMM Ready timer expiry”.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 67
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 67
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Activation / De-activation [cont.]
� Activation
� There is NC2 activation only at the beginning of a DL packet transfer
T_WAIT_PMR
NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T
MS BSS
Packet Measurement Order [NC2] / PACCH (4)
Packet Measurement Report / PACCH (5)
On-going UL TBF (1)
Packet Measurement Report / PACCH (6)
Packet Downlink Assignment / PACCH (2)
Packet Control Acknowledgement (3)
DL LLC PDU
READY MS in NC0
READY MS in NC2
(1) It is assumed the MS has just initiated the establishment of a UL TBF, but no DL TBF is on-going. If there
is no UL TBF on-going, the NC2 activation is also done on receipt of the acknowledgement of the DL TBF
establishment performed on the (P)CCCH.
(2) The receipt of a DL LLC PDU triggers the establishment of the DL TBF on the PACCH of the UL TBF.
(3) The MS acknowledges the Packet Downlink Assignment message by a Packet Control Acknowledgement
message.
(4) Upon receipt of the Packet Control Acknowledgement message, the BSS sends to the MS on the PACCH of
the on-going DL TBF a Packet Measurement Order message forcing the MS to operate in NC2 mode and
starts the timer T_WAIT_PMR. The Packet Measurement Order message is sent without a polling
indication. The Packet Measurement Order message provides the MS with the following NC measurement
parameters NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER, NC_NON_DRX_PERIOD, NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_I,
NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T. The timer T_WAIT_PMR monitors the reception of the Packet Measurement
Report messages.
(5)-(6) On the allocated UL RLC blocks, the MS sends a Packet Measurement Report message every
NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T seconds. The timer T_WAIT_PMR is stopped at the receipt of the first Packet
Measurement Report message. At T_WAIT_PMR expiry, if MAX_RETRANS_SIG ≠ 0 a new Packet
Measurement Order is sent to the MS and the timer T_WAIT_PMR is started. Such mechanism is applied
MAX_RETRANS_SIG attempts.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 68
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 68
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Activation / De-activation [cont.]
� De-activation at the end of the packet transfer
� There is NC2 de-activation at the normal end of a DL Packet Transfer Mode
Packet Downlink Ack/Nack / PACCH (2)
Last DL RLC data block with a polling indication (1)
Packet Measurement Order [Reset] / PACCH (3)
MS BSS
On-going DL TBF
READY MS in NC2
STANDBY MS in NC0
(1) It is assumed that a DL TBF is on-going. The BSS sends to the MS the last useful data block (case of
normal TBF release) or the RLC block containing the last dummy UI command (case of a delayed TBF
release).
(2) The MS acknowledges the received block by sending the final Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message to the
BSS.
� Note: When an RLC mode change is detected, the BSS waits for the final Packet Downlink Ack/Nack
message before re-establishing the DL TBF with the new RLC mode. As the fast DL TBF establishment
occurs on receipt of the final Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message, a Packet Measurement Order
[Reset] message would be immediately followed by a Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. In
order to avoid that useless message exchange, the NC2 mode is not deactivated in this case.
(3) If there is no on-going UL TBF, upon receipt of the final Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message, the BSS
sends to the MS on the PACCH of the DL TBF a Packet Measurement Order message with a Reset command.
The Reset command forces the MS to realign its behavior on the parameters broadcast in the (packet)
system information messages on (P)BCCH (i.e., return to NC0). To ensure a high probability of correct
reception by the MS, the RRM orders MAC to repeat the Packet Measurement Order (Reset) message several
times. The number of repetitions is defined by the O&M parameter N_SIG_REPEAT. In case the Packet
Measurement Order (Reset) message is not received by the MS although repeated, the MS will remain in NC2
mode for the whole duration of the Ready timer, while the operator requested the network to deactivate
NC2 at the end of the Packet Transfer Mode. Because repetitions should ensure that this happens very
scarcely, the Alcatel BSS will not handle those rare events. Then, if a Packet Measurement Report is
received in Packet Idle Mode, it will be discarded.
There is no NC2 deactivation at the end (normal or abnormal) of the UL Packet Transfer Mode, and at the
abnormal end of the DL Packet Transfer Mode.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 69
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 69
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Measurement Reporting and Processing
� DL RXLEV
� The MS sends a “Packet Measurement Report” message containing the RXLEV measured on the serving cell and the 6 best neighbor cells
� The “Packet Measurement Report” message is sent every:
� NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T ms, in case of Packet Transfer Mode
� NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_I ms, in case of Packet Idle Mode
On the one hand the NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T parameter is defined by O&M on a per cell basis. On the
other hand, the NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_I is set on a BSS cell basis without OMC-R access (default value =
max value = 61.44 s i.e., 256 52-multiframes).
These parameters are provided to the MS either in a Packet Measurement Order message or in a Packet Cell
Change Order message. They are never broadcast on (packet) system information messages.
Packet Measurement Report message contents
� TLLI of the MS
� NC_MODE (Set to NC2)
� RXLEV_SERVING_CELL (RXLEV measured on the serving cell)
� NUMBER_OF_NC_MEASUREMENTS (Number of measurements reported for the neighboring cells)
� FREQUENCY_N (Refer to the ARFCN or ARFCN and BSIC of a neighboring cell)
� BSIC (BSIC of the indexed neighboring cells)
� RXLEV_N (RXLEV of the indexed neighboring cells)
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 70
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 70
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Measurement Reporting and Processing [cont.]
� DL RXLEV averaging for serving cell and neighbor cell
� AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2p = (1-f)* AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2p-1 + f*RXLEV_Np
� RXLEV_Np is the RXLEV sample reported by the MS in the incoming Packet Measurement Report message
� f is the averaging forgetting factor and is derived from the parameter NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR
� p is the iteration index
NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR = 0.13 ((Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level).
If the neighboring cell n was not reported in the precedent Packet Measurement Report but just in the last
one:
� AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2p(n) = (1-f) *AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2p-1(n) + (1-(1-f) ) *RXLEV_Np(n)
� = (p –1) – i
� The index i represents the last time an NC measurement for that neighboring cell has been reported
in a Packet Measurement Report message.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 71
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 71
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Measurement Reporting and Processing [cont.]
� RXQUAL for a GPRS TBF
� In the DL, the MS sends a “Packet DL Ack/Nack” message containing the RXQUAL measured on the serving cell every T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport ms
� In the UL, the MFS assesses the RXQUAL for each RLC block received
� MeanBEP for an EGPRS TBF
� In the DL, the MS sends an “EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack” message containing the MeanBEP measured on the serving cell every T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReportms
� In the UL, the MFS assesses the MeanBEP for each RLC block received
T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport and T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport are defined by O&M on a per cell basis.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 72
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 72
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Measurement Reporting and Processing [cont.]
� DL RXQUAL averaging
�
�
� forgetting factor:�
� is the time between 2 DL RXQUAL samples
� TNC2 set to the parameter NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD
� UL RXQUAL and MeanBEP (UL & DL) are averaged using the same formula and the same parameter
DL_RXQUALU
12AL_NCAV_DL_RXQU*
U
112AL_NCAV_DL_RXQU
p
1p
p
p +
−= −
1UαU 1p-∆tp
2NCp +=
( ) 2NC/T12NC β-1α =
0.9β=
pt∆
U0 = 0, consequently U1 = 1.
In CS4, if RxQual = 7 is reported by the MS, then this measurement is tagged as invalid and so, not taken
into account in the averaging.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 73
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 73
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Detection
� Trigger conditions
Detection of a better neighboring cell
Too low downlink received signal level
Too bad downlink radio quality
Too bad uplink radio quality
Name of the cause
Cause 12PT2Lowest
Cause 5PT1…
Cause 4PT3…
Cause 2PT4Highest
Similar HO cause
Cause reference
Priority
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 74
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 74
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Detection [cont.]
� Cause PT3 for a GPRS TBF
� AV_DL_RXQUAL_NC2 > NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
� If NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR = 7 (Never), the cause PT3 is disabled
� Cause PT3 for an EGPRS TBF
� AV_DL_MeanBEP_NC2 < NC_DL_MeanBEP_THR_xxSK_yyyyyy
� xxSK: GMSK or 8-PSK
� yyyyy:� type1: type 1 ARQ (no Incremental Redundancy)
� type2: type 2 ARQ (with Incremental Redundancy)
� If NC_DL_MeanBEP_THR_xxSK_yyyyyy = 0, the cause PT3 is disabled
Cause PT3 is checked only for the serving cell each time an (EGPRS) Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message is
received provided that the DL TBF is not in delayed release state and provided that the
T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID seconds have elapsed since the receipt of the first Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message
of the DL TBF.
T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID aims at not triggering false alarms at the beginning of the TBF and not triggering an
NC cell reselection for a very short TBF.
In CS4, if RxQual = 7 is reported by the MS, then this measurement is tagged as invalid and so, it will be not
taken into account in the averaging and will not disturb the PT3 triggering.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 75
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 75
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Detection [cont.]
� Only one NC_DL_MeanBEP threshold is applied for cause PT3 during an EGPRS TBF, and derived from NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
� NC_DL_MeanBEP_THR_xxSK_yyyyyy = NC_DL_MeanBEP
� NC_DL_MeanBEP = (23-3* NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR)
� If NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR = 7 then NC_DL_MeanBEP = 0
� i.e., the cause PT3 is disabled
� Same behavior for cause PT4 in the UL
� NC_UL_MeanBEP = (23-3* NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR)
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 76
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 76
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Detection [cont.]
� Cause PT4 for a GPRS TBF
� AV_UL_RXQUAL_NC2 > NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR
� If NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR = 7 (Never), the cause PT4 is disabled
� Cause PT4 for an EGPRS TBF
� AV_UL_MeanBEP_NC2 < NC_UL_MeanBEP_THR_xxSK_yyyyyy
� xxSK: GMSK or 8-PSK
� yyyyy:� type1: type 1 ARQ (no Incremental Redundancy)
� type2: type 2 ARQ (with Incremental Redundancy)
� NC_UL_MeanBEP_THR_xxSK_yyyyyy = NC_UL_MeanBEP
� NC_UL_MeanBEP = (23-3* NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR)
� If NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR = 7 then NC_UL_MeanBEP = 0
� i.e., the cause PT4 is disabled
Cause PT4 is checked only for the serving cell whenever one UL RLC data block is correctly received for the
on-going UL TBF provided that T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID seconds have elapsed since the computation of the
first UL samples of the UL TBF.
T_NC_RXQUAL_VALID aims at not triggering false alarms at the beginning of the TBF and not triggering an
NC cell reselection for a very short TBF.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 77
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 77
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Detection [cont.]
� Cause PT1
� AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2 < NC_DL_RXLEV_THR + Max(BNC2,0)
� without PBCCH, BNC2 = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH – P
� with PBCCH BNC2 = GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH – P
� If NC_DL_RXLEV_THR = -110dBm (Never), the cause PT1 is disabled
� Cause PT2
� C2NC2(n) - C2NC2(s) > NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(s,n)
� If PBCCH is present in the serving cell, C2NC2 is replaced with C32NC2AND
� AV_DL_RXLEV_NC2 <= NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR
� If NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(s,n) = 128dB (Never), the cause PT2 from s to n is disabled
The cause PT1 is equivalent to check the condition C1NC2 < 0 assuming that the (GPRS_)RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
threshold is replaced with NC_DL_RXLEV_THR threshold.
Cause PT2 is checked among the neighboring cells n upon receipt of a Packet Measurement Report message.
It is triggered if the value C2NC2 or C32NC2 of one neighboring cell n exceeds the value C2NC2 or C32NC2
of the serving cell s by at least the O&M hysteresis NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(s,n) defined per cell
adjacency link (respectively whether or not there is a PBCCH in the serving cell).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 78
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 78
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Evaluation: Functional Entities
� Cell filtering process
� This process builds a Filtering Cell List depending on:
� The content of the Rejected Cell list
� EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR
� C1NC2(n)
� GPRS operational state of the neighbor cells
� Cell ranking process
� This process builds a Filtering Cell List depending on:
� C31NC2� Load situation
� C1NC2 & C2NC2
Cell filtering process
Cell rankingprocess
- cause reference
- neighboring cell that checked the cause
Filtering cell list
Reference of the target cell
The Cell Filtering process is computed on receipt of an NC Cell Reselection Evaluation Request message.
Before processing the cell ranking, all the candidate neighboring cells are gathered in the Raw Cell List.
The serving cell is always included in this latter list.
The contents of the Raw Cell List depend on the cause reference that triggered the NC cell reselection
evaluation:
� If Cause PT1, or PT3, or PT4 is checked, then the Raw Cell List regroups the cells reported in the Packet
Measurement Report message provided that the cells are configured by O&M. The serving cell is always
included in the list.
� If only Cause PT2 is checked, then the Raw Cell List regroups all the neighboring cells that verify Cause
PT2 and that are reported in the Packet Measurement Report message. The serving cell is always included
in the list.
The Raw Cell List is then filtered according to the contents of a Rejected Cell List, according to the flag
EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR of the serving cell and of the neighboring cells, and according to the C1NC2
parameter of the neighboring cells. The output cell list is here called the Filtering Cell List.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 79
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 79
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Evaluation: Criteria Computation
� Path loss criterion parameter C1NC2
� C1NC2(n) = AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) – RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n) - max(MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)
– P(n), 0)
� Cell ranking criterion parameter C2NC2� If PENALTY_TIME <> 31:
� C2NC2(n) = C1NC2(n) + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)
� Else� C2NC2(n) = C1NC2(n) - CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)
� If the T_NC_PING_PONG timer is running, the anti-ping-pong offset NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET is subtracted from the C2NC2 of the neighboring cells
The cell n denotes either the serving cell or a neighboring cell.
In the above equations, the following notations mean:
� AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) is the average received signal level measured by the MS on the BCCH of the cell n.
� RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n) is the minimum received signal level required to perform an access to the cell n.
� MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n) is the maximum transmit power of the MS when accessing the cell n.
P(n) is the maximum output RF power of the MS in the BCCH frequency band of the cell n. P(n) gives the MS
Radio Access Capability Information Element provided in the Packet Resource Request message or in the DL
LLC PDU. In the NC cell reselection procedure, the parameter P(n) shall always refer to the RF power
capability of the GMSK modulation.
Note that all values are expressed in dBm.
The cell ranking criterion parameter C2NC2 is used to order the candidate cells on a radio criterion. This
criterion applies only in serving cells where there is no PBCCH established.
� CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n) is a positive offset which favors or disfavors the cell n.
� PENALTY_TIME(n) indicates whether the cell reselection offset shall be positive or negative.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 80
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 80
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Evaluation: Cell Filtering Process
� A candidate neighboring cell n is filtered out when:
� A previous NC cell reselection failed toward this cell and T_NC_REJ_CELL[n] is running
� The timer T_NC_REJ_CELL[n] is started or restarted each time the new cell n is inserted in the Rejected Cell List
� At expiry of T_NC_REJ_CELL[n], the rejected cell is removed from the Rejected Cell List
� One T_NC_REJ_CELL by cell (and not by MS)
� EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n) = enabled
� C1NC2(n) < 0
� GPRS not activated
� RA_COLOUR = -1
The notation T_NC_REJ_CELL[n] refers to the timer associated to the cell n.
For the purpose of filtering cells towards which a previous NC cell reselection failed, the RRM manages a
Rejected Cell List. Each neighboring cell n of the list is guarded by the timer T_NC_REJ_CELL[n]. While
T_NC_REJ_CELL[n] is running, the neighboring cell n shall not be selected for any NC cell reselection.
The Rejected Cell List shall be able to contain up to 32 neighboring cells. If the Rejected cell List is full,
the oldest cell is discarded and the new one is stored.
In addition, if the flag EN_OUT_GOING_GPRS_REDIR(s) of the serving cell is set to “Enabled”, the serving
cell is removed from the Raw Cell List. Indeed, in such cells, the neighboring cells do not need to be better
than the serving cell as a GPRS redirection is not triggered due to a bad radio link, but is triggered in order
to redirect the MS towards a more appropriate neighboring cell to carry PS traffic.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 81
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 81
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Evaluation: Cell Ranking Process
� Without PBCCH
� The best candidate cell is the cell for which the following ordered criteria are fulfilled:
1. C31NC2 >= 0
2. Load situation = low
3. Best C2NC2
� If all the candidate cells have their criterion C31NC2 < 0, then
� The best candidate cell is the cell which has the best C2NC2
Once the best candidate cell has been found, the MFS checks whether or not the best cell is the serving
cell:
� If the best cell is not the serving one, the NC cell reselection evaluation function sends an NC Cell
Reselection Alarm Indication message to the NC cell reselection execution function in order to trigger the
execution of the NC cell reselection.
� If the best cell is the serving cell, the NC cell reselection procedure is stopped.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 82
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 82
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Evaluation: Cell Ranking Process [cont.]
� Serving cell:� C31NC2(n) = AV_RXLEV_NC2(n) – HCS_THR(n)
� HCS_THR(n), signal threshold for applying the load cell situation criterion.
� C31NC2 is used in serving cell, to differentiate the low loaded target cells from the high loaded target cells.
Once the best candidate cell has been found, the MFS checks whether or not the best cell is the serving
cell:
� If the best cell is not the serving one, the NC cell reselection evaluation function sends an NC Cell
Reselection Alarm Indication message to the NC cell reselection execution function in order to trigger the
execution of the NC cell reselection.
� If the best cell is the serving cell, the NC cell reselection procedure is stopped.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 83
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 83
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Evaluation: Load Evaluation
� Every 5 seconds, the MFS computes for each cell
� Where:
� UL_PS_used_Bandwidth = Nb of UL TBFs / MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH
� DL_PS_used_Bandwidth = Nb of DL TBFs / MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH
� Total_PS_Bandwidth = MAX_PDCH – NB_TS_MPDCH
� CS_Used_Bandwidth = Total_PS_Bandwidth – N_PDCH_ALLOCATED
� N_PDCH_ALLOCATED = Number of SPDCHs currently allocated to the MFS
[ ]100
andwidthTotal_PS_B
ndwidthCS_Used_Ba_BandwidthDL_PS_Used;_BandwidthUL_PS_UsedMAX%)(in NC2_Load ×+=
∑=
ALLOCATEDPDCHN
i
__
1
∑=
ALLOCATEDPDCHN
i
__
1
UL_PS_Used_Bandwidth is the bandwidth used by PS traffic in the UL direction.
DL_PS_Used_Bandwidth is the bandwidth used by PS traffic in the DL direction.
CS_Used_Bandwidth is the bandwidth used by CS traffic.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 84
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 84
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Evaluation: Load Evaluation [cont.]
� NC2_Load is averaged using the sliding window NC2_LOAD_EV_PERIOD(=3)
� This load average is then compared to the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING as followed:
� If Load average <= THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING then
� Load situation = low
� Else (Load average > THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING)
� Load situation = high
� Case of the external cells (inter BSC)
� If THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING < 100% then Load situation = low
� Else (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING = 100%) then Load situation = high
Exercise
The MFS shares the NC2 load situation information among the different cells of the BSS (or at least between
the cells having a cell reselection link with the serving cell).
In case of an external cell, the load evaluation is different since the load situation of such cells is unknown
in the serving cell.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 85
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 85
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Execution with NACC
T_Wait_Flush
T_Ack_Wait
On going UL TBF (8)
On going UL or DL TBF (1)
MS BSSServing cell
Packet Cell Change Order / PACCH (3)
Packet Measurement Report / PACCH (2)
BSSTarget cell
SGSN
Packet Control Acknowledgement / PACCH (5)(4)
Packet Channel Request / PRACH (6)
Packet Uplink Assignment / PCCCH (7)
UL LLC PDU [TLLI] (9)
FLUSH-LL PDU [TLLI, old BVCI] (10)
FLUSH-LL-ACK PDU [TLLI, “deleted”] (11)
Packet Neighbour Cell Data (SI3) / PDCH
Packet Neighbour Cell Data (S1) / PDCH
Packet Neighbour Cell Data (SI13) / PDCH
(1) A UL or DL TBF is assumed to be on-going.
(2) The MS sends a Packet Measurement Report message on one of the allocated UL blocks on the PACCH.
(3) Upon receipt of the Packet Measurement Report message, the BSS detects that an NC cell reselection
must be triggered and therefore orders the MS to reselect a new cell by sending a Packet Cell Change
Order message on the PACCH of the DL or UL TBF. If both a UL and a DL TBF are on-going, the message is
preferentially addressed by a DL TFI. The Packet Cell Change Order message is sent in acknowledged
mode and contains the ARFCN and the BSIC of the target cell plus the NC parameters of the target cell
(if the MS can operate in NC2 mode in the target cell). When sending the Packet Cell Change Order
message, the BSS starts the timer T_ACK_WAIT to monitor the receipt of the Packet Control
Acknowledgement message.
(4)-(5) Upon receipt of the Packet Cell Change Order message, the MS aborts its on-going TBF in the serving
cell and sends the Packet Control Acknowledgement message. Once the MS has sent the Packet Control
Acknowledgement message, the MS switches to the new cell. Upon receipt of the Packet Control
Acknowledgement message, the BSS starts the timer T_WAIT_FLUSH (which monitors the reception of
the FLUSH-LL PDU) and requests the release of the on-going TBF(s) (if any). The radio resources are
immediately released, i.e., without freezing them. In case the radio resources are already frozen, the
freezing timer is stopped and the radio resources are immediately released.
(6)-(8) After acquiring the full PSI cycle and successfully decoding the PSI1 and PSI2 messages of the target
cell, the MS initiates a UL TBF establishment in the new cell.
(9) The target BSS sends to the SGSN the first UL LLC PDU containing the TLLI of the MS.
(10) By comparing the previous couple and the new one (BVCI; NSEI), the SGSN detects that the MS has
changed of cell and sends a FLUSH-LL PDU to the old cell.
(11) Upon receipt of the FLUSH-LL PDU, the BSS stops the timer T_WAIT_FLUSH, and either transfers the
pending DL LLC PDUs to the new cell (if the old and new cells belong to the same routing area and the
same NE) or deletes them. The BSS acknowledges the FLUSH-LL PDU by sending a FLUSH-LL-ACK PDU to
the SGSN. When the feature “full intra-RA LLC PDU rerouting” is implemented, a rerouting will be
possible between 2 different NSEs.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 86
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 86
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
NC Cell Reselection Execution with LLC PDU Rerouting
T_Wait_Flush
T_Ack_Wait
On going UL TBF
On going DL TBF
MS BSSServing cell
Packet Cell Change Order / PACCH
Packet Measurement Report / PACCH
BSSTarget cell
SGSN
Packet Control Acknowledgement / PACCH
Packet Channel Request / PRACH
Packet Uplink Assignment / PCCCH
UL LLC PDU [TLLI]
FLUSH-LL [TLLI, old BVCI, new BVCI, (new NSEI)]
FLUSH-LL-ACK [TLLI, “transferred”]
LLC PDU(s) rerouting
In Packet Transfer Mode, it happens that Downlink LLC PDU frames, which have been transmitted by the
SGSN to the BSS, are not received by the MS because the MS performs a cell reselection. Indeed, these PDUs
are discarded by the BSS. The BSS informs the SGSN that it has discarded these PDUs, and the SGSN has to
send them again. With the feature Downlink LLC PDU rerouting, the BSS keeps in memory these PDUs, and
transmits them to the MS in the target cell, after the cell reselection.
EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING is the OMC-R parameter that activates the DL rerouting on a per BSS basis.
If the SGSN supports the INR option (Inter-NSE Rerouting), a rerouting is requested by providing the BVCI
and the NSEI of the new cell in the FLUSH-LL message in case of a cell change between two different NSEs.
Otherwise (same NSE) only the BVCI of the new cell is provided.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 87
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 87
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
Full Intra-RA LLC PDU Rerouting
� Available whatever the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER: NC0 or NC2
� If EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING = enabled
� If the SGSN requests a rerouting (new BVCI included in Flush LL)� The MFS can perform an intra-RA intra-NSE rerouting
� If the SGSN does not support Inter-NSE rerouting� The MFS performs an autonomous intra-RA inter-NSE rerouting
� Summary
DL LLC PDU reroutingNoonly old BVCI
DL LLC PDU deletiononly old BVCI
DL LLC PDU reroutingYes
old BVCI + new BVCI
same RA
different NSEs
DL LLC PDU deletiononly old BVCI
DL LLC PDU reroutingold BVCI + new BVCIsame RAsame NSE
MFS behaviorSGSN Inter-NSEcapability
Flush LLinformation
Old and new ell
In case of MS cell change, the control of the rerouting of DL LLC PDUs from one cell to another is left to the
SGSN
In case of MS cell change, the SGSN sends a Flush-LL PDU to the BSS, in order:
� either to delete the outstanding PDUs in the old cell buffer,
� or to reroute them to the new cell.
When the MS operates in NC2 mode, the “old” and the “new” cells are known by the BSS.
Consequently an autonomous rerouting can be performed at Flush-LL receipt.
When the MS operates in NC0 mode, the BSS does not know the link between the “old” and the “new” cells.
To find this link, the BSS uses the TLLI of the cell Update.
� As this message cannot be identified as such, it is checked that the TLLI of a UL TBF:
� does not exist in any of the MS contexts stored in the cell.
� is not a foreign or a random TLLI.
� A “TLLI retrieval” process is started to try to find a cell of the same RA, on any GPU, in which this TLLI
exists.
� When the search is successful, the rerouting can be performed at Flush-LL receipt.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 88
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 88
� Useful in multilayer and multiband networks, in order to reduce the number of reselections
� If EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(s) = enabled
� As soon as the MS is in Packet Transfer Mode, it is redirected from the cell
� Then, the cell ranking process is started to find the best candidate cell
� According to the operator strategy
� See session 4 for a strategy example
6 NC2 Cell Reselection
Outgoing GPRS Redirection
Exercise
An outgoing GPRS redirection is an NC cell reselection which is triggered when the MS enters the packet
transfer mode in the serving cell even if the radio link is good.
The intention of GPRS redirections is to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry PS
traffic (for instance a macro cell).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 89
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 89
7 Flow Control at the Gb Interface
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 90
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 90
7 Flow Control at the Gb Interface
BSSGP
� Only DL flow control is performed between the BSS and the SGSN
� Principle of the DL flow control mechanism:
� the BSS sends to the SGSN the flow control parameters in the FLOW-CONTROL-MS/BVC messages
� the flow control parameters allow the SGSN to locally control its transmission towards the BSS
PayloadTLLIBVCI
LLC frame
BSSGP frame
Used to perform MS flow controlUsed to perform BVC flow control
Caution: LLC frames are encapsulated 1:1 into BSSGP frames. This is the reason why we can say that there
is an LLC frame flow control mechanism at BSSGP level.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 91
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 91
7 Flow Control at the Gb Interface
Flow Control Performed on SGSN Side
� The SGSN shall perform flow control on each BVC and on each MS
� The flow control is performed on each LLC PDU first by the MS flow control mechanism and then by the BVC flow control mechanism:
� if an LLC PDU is passed by the MS flow control then the SGSN applies the BVC flow control to the LLC PDU
� if an LLC PDU is passed by both flow control mechanisms, the entire LLC PDU is delivered to the BSS
MS flow control MS flow control MS flow control
BVC flow control
BSS
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 92
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 92
7 Flow Control at the Gb Interface
Flow Control Performed on SGSN Side [cont.]
� Leaky bucket algorithm:
� An LLC PDU is passed as long as the bucket counter (B) plus the length of the LLC PDU does not exceed the bucket size (Bmax)
� When the LLC PDU is passed, its length is added to B
� Any LLC PDU not passed is delayed until B plus the LLC PDU length is less than Bmax
� The algorithm takes into account the leak rate of the bucket (R)
Leaky bucket principle
bucket size (B)
Max bucket size (Bmax)
leaking rate (R)
new LLC PDU?
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 93
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 93
7 Flow Control at the Gb Interface
Flow Control Performed on BSS Side
� The BSS controls the DL transmission of the SGSN by sending the parameters Bmax and R in the flow control PDU:
� after the sending of a FLOW_CONTROL_BVC PDU, the BSS cannot send a new FLOW_CONTROL_BVC PDU before T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell seconds
� T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell is a BSS parameter
� Default value = 0
� By default, the BVC flow control is disabled
� after the sending of a FLOW_CONTROL_MS PDU, the BSS cannot send a new FLOW_CONTROL_MS PDU before T_Flow_Ctrl_MS seconds
� T_Flow_Ctrl_MS is a BSS parameter
� Default value = 10 s
NB: the cell flow control is performed more frequently than the MS flow control because:
� The radio resource availability for a TBF is always shorter than the guarding time of a PDCH, therefore
the MS individual traffic is less of an influence on the leaking rate.
� The radio resource available for one MS may change from one TBF to another.
� The combined traffic of all the GPRS MSs in the cell exchanging data with the SGSN has to be mapped
onto a BVC, which may become the blocking factor as the BVC is mapped on an NSVC, which is mapped on
a PVC, carried by a BC which has a fixed maximum capacity.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 94
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 94
7 Flow Control at the Gb Interface
Flow Control Performed on BSS Side [cont.]
� FLOW_CONTROL_BVC PDU:
� BVC_Bucket_Size: the maximum size of the cell buffer in the MFS
� BVC_Bucket_Leak_Rate: the measured throughput in the cell from the RRM to the RLC
� Bmax_default_MS: the default value of the maximum size of the MS buffer in the MFS
� R_default_MS: the default value of the measured throughput for the MS from the RRM to the RLC
Formulas:
�The BVC_Bucket_Size (value expressed in octet) is calculated as follows:
� Case T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell ≠ 0:
� BVC_Bucket_Size = Flow_Dim_safety_MS * Max_PDCH * Max_Rate_PDCH * (1/8) * Max_Rate_Safety * T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell
� Case T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell = 0:
� BVC_Bucket_Size = Flow_Dim_safety_MS * Max_PDCH * Max_Rate_PDCH * (1/8) * Max_Rate_Safety *
Def_value_T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell
�The BVC_Bucket_Leak_Rate (value expressed in 100 bits/sec) is calculated as follows:
� Case T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell ≠ 0:
� IF B_BVC < BVC_Bucket_Size
� BVC_Bucket_Leak_Rate = [(BVC_Bucket_Size - B_BVC )*8] / [T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell * Flow_Dim_safety_BVC * 100]
� ELSE
� BVC_Bucket_Leak_Rate = 0
� Case T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell = 0
� BVC_Bucket_Leak_Rate = (Max_PDCH * Max_Rate_PDCH * Max_Rate_Safety)/100
�The Bmax_default_MS (value expressed in octet) is calculated as follows:
� Case T_Flow_Ctrl_MS ≠ 0:
� Bmax_default_MS = Flow_Dim_safety_MS * Max_Rate_PDCH * (1/8) * Max_Rate_Safety * T_Flow_Ctrl_MS
� Case T_Flow_Ctrl_MS = 0:
� Bmax_default_MS = Flow_Dim_safety_MS * Max_Rate_PDCH * (1/8) * Max_Rate_Safety * Def_value_T_Flow_Ctrl_MS
�The R_default_MS (value expressed in 100 bits/sec) is calculated as follows:
� R_default_MS = (Flow_Dim_safety_MS * Max_Rate_PDCH * Max_Rate_Safety)/100
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 95
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 95
7 Flow Control at the Gb Interface
Flow Control Performed on BSS Side [cont.]
� FLOW_CONTROL_MS PDU:
� MS_Bucket_Size: the maximum size of the MS buffer in the MFS
� MS_Bucket_Leak_Rate: the measured throughput for the MS from the RRM to the RLC
Formula:
� The MS_Bucket_Size (value expressed in octet) is calculated as follows:
� MS_Bucket_Size = n * Max_Rate_PDCH * (1/8) * Max_Rate_Safety * T_Flow_Ctrl_MS
� The MS_Bucket_Leak_Rate (value expressed in 100 bit/sec) is calculated as follows:
� MS_Bucket_Leak_Rate = B_MS * 100 / MS_Bucket_Size
Explanation:
� Max_PDCH
� O&M parameter indicating the maximum number of PDCHs that can be established in the cell.
� Max_Rate_PDCH
� maximum rate of one PDCH in the considered cell (value in bits/s)
� Max_Rate_Safety
� Safety factor to compensate the Max_Rate_PDCH in the calculation of BVC_Bucket_Size and MS_Bucket_Size
� Flow_Dim_safety_BVC
� O&M safety factor, used to tune the BVC bucket value
� Flow_Dim_safety_MS
� O&M safety factor, used to tune the MS bucket value
� MAX_LLC_PDU
� maximum length of a DL LLC PDU (the SGSN has to be able to send at least one DL LLC PDU)
� B_BVC
� value in octet of the current bucket size at MFS side for the cell. It corresponds to the amount of LLC waiting frames for this BVC (cell)
� T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell
� sending period of NM-FLOW-CONTROL-CELL-req
� T_Flow_Ctrl_MS
� sending period of NM-FLOW-CONTROL-MS-req
� Def_value_T_Flow_Ctrl_Cell
� default value forT_Flow_Ctrl_Cell (set to 5 sec)
� Def_value_T_Flow_Ctrl_MS
� default value for T_Flow_Ctrl_MS (set to 10 sec)
� B_MS
� Value in octets of the current bucket size at MFS side for the MS. It corresponds to the amount of LLC PDUs waiting to be transmitted for this MS.
� n
� Maximum number of PDCHs that can be allocated to the MS according to its multislot class.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 96
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 96
8 Radio Link Supervision
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 97
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 97
8 Radio Link Supervision
Principles
� During a UL or DL packet transmission, the corresponding TBF can be released due to an abnormal situation:
� no acknowledgement or data received
� the transmission is stalled
� too low transmission efficiency
� The abnormal release is always followed by the re-establishment of the TBF in case of an uplink transfer (initiative of the MS)
� In case of a downlink transfer, most of the SGSNs do not take the initiative to re-establish the TBF
The RLS mechanisms processes in the MFS are based on the following assumption:
« in a specific transfer situation, the MFS is expecting the MS to behave in a specific way »:
� In a UL TBF, the MFS schedules a USF for UL blocks and expects the MS to understand the MFS’s
acknowledgements.
� In a DL TBF, the MFS sends blocks to the MS and expects them to be acknowledged when scheduled by the
MFS (use of RRBP).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 98
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 98
8 Radio Link Supervision
DL TBF
DL ACK/NACK PERIOD blocks
RRBP
≠≠≠≠ false
Ø N3105 = N3105+1
PDTCH PDTCH
PACCH
Scheduling of “Packet DL Ack/Nack”
PACCH block
N3105>N3105_LIMIT
PDTCH
Stop sending DLPDTCH blocks
The MFS counts the number of consecutive PACKET DL ACK/NACK not received due to loss on the radio
interface:
� For a GPRS TBF, if the counter is above the threshold TBF_CS_DL and CS-4, CS-3 or CS-2 is used, the MFS
switches to CS-1.
� For an EGPRS TBF, if the counter is above the threshold TBF_MCS_DL and MCS-9, MCS-8…, MCS-3 or MCS-2
is used, the MFS switches to MCS-1.
� If the counter is above the threshold N3105_LIMIT, the DL TBF is abnormally released:
� the MFS stops sending packets to the MS and sends a message to the SGSN (Radio Status).
� it is up to the SGSN to re-establish the DL TBF.
� the MS releases the TBF on its side.
If N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger a link
adaptation but a TBF release.
For an EGPRS TBF, the MFS considers EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT.
N3105_LIMIT = 20 (Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level (cell level).
EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT = 20(Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level (cell level).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 99
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 99
8 Radio Link Supervision
DL TBF [cont.]
DL ACK/NACK PERIOD blocks
RRBP
≠≠≠≠ false
PDTCH PDTCH
PACCH
Packet DL Ack/Nack
Scheduling of “Packet DL Ack/Nack”
PACCH block
PDTCH
Stop sending DLPDTCH blocks
N_StagnatingWindowDL =N_StagnatingWindowDL
+1
N_StagnatingWindowDL > NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT
Same oldest RLC block
Nack in the RBB
Other Abnormal DL TBF release: DL window stalled
� In GPRS acknowledged mode, NstagnatingWindowDL counter shall be incremented when the same oldest
RLC data block in the transmit window is not acknowledged by the last received bitmap.
� If N_StagnatingWindowDL exceeds its limit, then the network shall terminate the TBF.
� NStagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT = 32 (Alcatel recommended value) and it canbe set at OMC-R level (cell
level).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 100
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 100
8 Radio Link Supervision
UL TBF - Abnormal Release with Random Access
N3101 = N3101+NØPDTCH
N3101>N3101_LIMIT
PACCH
Stop sending “Packet ULACK/NACK” PACCH blocks
ØPDTCH
N consecutive
USF
USF
Packet Random Access
N3101_LIMIT = 64 (Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level (cell level).
The MFS manages several counters:
� N3101: number of RLC PDUs consecutively lost since the last reception of a UL RLC PDU:
� N3101 is incremented each time a UL radio block is allocated to the MS and no data is received.
� if N3101 is above N3101_LIMIT, the UL TBF is abnormally released: the MFS stops sending PACKET UL
ACK/NACK to the MS.
� The MS waits for PACKET UL ACK/NACK and then releases the TBF on its side.
� Then the MS sends a random access to re-establish the UL TBF.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 101
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 101
8 Radio Link Supervision
UL TBF - Abnormal Release with Random Access [cont.]
SI=1
PDTCH
N_StagnatingWindowUL =N_StagnatingWindowUL +1
PACCH
Stop sending “Packet ULACK/NACK” PACCH blocks
SI=1
PDTCH
USF
USF
Packet Random Access
PACCH
N_StagnatingWindowUL > NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT
Other Abnormal UL TBF release: UL window stalled
� SI=1 in a UL RLC DATA BLOCK indicates that the MS transmit window is stalled.
� Upon detection of a stall condition, the network sends a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message and after a
round trip delay has elapsed, it increments N_ULStagnatingWindow.
� If N_StagnatingWindowUL exceeds its limit, then the network shall terminate the TBF.
� NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT = 10 (Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level (cell
level).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 102
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 102
8 Radio Link Supervision
UL TBF - Abnormal Release with Cell Reselection
RESELECTION
N3102
PAN_MAX
0
UL TBF
Abnormal
release
Random
Access
PAN_DEC
PAN_INC
Packet UL Ack/Nack
received OK
Abnormal release with cell reselection:
� procedure linked to the counter N3102 internal to the MS and initialized to PAN_MAX after each
reselection:
� each time the MS performs an abnormal release with random access, it decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC.
� each time the MS receives a PACKET UL ACK/NACK, it increases N3102 by PAN_INC.
� if N3102 reaches 0, the MS performs an abnormal release with cell reselection.
� the MS triggers a cell reselection procedure but nothing allows it to change its serving cell (need of a
Master PDCH to be able to re-select a new cell).
� after the cell reselection, the MS sends a random access to re-establish the UL TBF.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 103
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 103
8 Radio Link Supervision
UL TBF - Abnormal Release with Cell Reselection [cont.]
� If a Master PDCH is available in the serving cell
AND
� If RANDOM_ACC_RETRY = Allowed
� Then the following reselection algorithm is applied:
� The MS re-selects the cell with the highest RLA among the 6 best levels
� In this cell, if the MS cannot decode the PBCCH data block, it reselects the next highest Received Level Average
� If the cells with the 6 strongest RLAs have been tried but cannot be used, the MS performs a normal reselection (see 5 NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection)
� Else the normal reselection algorithm is applied (see 4)
� After T_RESEL, the MS is allowed to reselect the serving cell
RLA = Received Level Average.
T_RESEL = 5s (default value).
Extract of the 05.08 GSM standard:
In the event of an abnormal release with cell reselection (see 3GPP TS 04.60) when PBCCH exists, an
abnormal cell reselection based on BA(GPRS) shall be attempted. The MS shall perform the following
algorithm to determine which cell to be used for this cell reselection attempt.
If access to another cell is not allowed, i.e., RANDOM_ACCESS_RETRY bit is not set on the serving cell:
� i) The abnormal cell reselection attempt shall be abandoned.
If access to another cell is allowed, i.e., RANDOM_ACCESS_RETRY bit is set on the serving cell:
� i) The received level measurement samples taken on the carriers indicated in the BA (GPRS) received on
the serving cell in the last 5 seconds shall be averaged, and the carrier with the highest Received Level
Average (RLA) with permitted BSIC, i.e., the same as broadcast together with BA (GPRS), shall be taken.
� ii) On this carrier, the MS shall attempt to decode the PBCCH data block containing the parameters
affecting cell selection.
� iii) If the cell is suitable (see 3GPP TS 022), abnormal cell reselection shall be attempted on this cell.
� iv) If the MS is unable to decode the PBCCH data block or if the conditions in iii) are not met, the carrier
with the next highest Received Level Average (RLA) with permitted BSIC shall be taken, and the MS shall
repeat steps ii) and iii) above.
� v) If the cells with the 6 strongest Received Level Average (RLA) values with permitted BSICs have been
tried but cannot be used, the abnormal cell reselection attempt shall be abandoned.
The MS is under no circumstances allowed to access a cell to attempt abnormal cell reselection later than
20 seconds after the detection within the MS of the abnormal release causing the abnormal cell reselection
attempt. In the case where the 20 seconds elapse without a successful abnormal cell reselection, the
attempt shall be abandoned.
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 104
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 104
8 Radio Link Supervision
UL TBF in Ending Phase
N3103 = N3103+1ØPACCH
N3103>N3103_LIMIT
PACCH
Stop sending “Packet ULACK/NACK” PACCH blocks
Final
Block
PDTCH
USF
U
SF
PACCH
Final
Ack
Scheduling of “Packet Control Ack”
The MFS can also trigger an abnormal release at the end of a UL TBF:
� the MFS counts the number of PACKET CONTROL ACK not received in response to the PACKET UL
ACK/NACK which indicates the end of the TBF.
� if the counter is above N3103_LIMIT, the UL TBF is abnormally released: the MFS stops sending PACKET UL
ACK/NACK to the MS.
N3103_LIMIT = 64 (Alcatel recommended value) and it can be set at OMC-R level (cell level).
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 105
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 105
8 Radio Link Supervision
UL and DL TBF
� A (E)TX_Efficiency is computed every
� TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD transmitted RLC data blocks for a GPRS TBF
� E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD transmitted RLC data blocks for an EGPRS TBF
� and compared to the following thresholds:
� TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR in Acknowledged mode
� TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR in Non-Acknowledged mode
� If the TX_Efficiency is below these thresholds, the TBF must be released
� It is done as an abnormal release by the MFS:
� the MFS stops sending DL RLC PDUs in case of a DL TBF
� the MFS stops sending PACKET UL ACK/NACK in case of a UL TBF
Exercise
Radio Link Supervision based on TX_Efficiency monitoring
� It was proposed since B7 to use the transmission efficiency, i.e., the ratio of the average net bit rate over the gross
bit rate.
� This transmission efficiency can be computed approximately as:
� Where:
� NB_SENT is the number of transmitted RLC data blocks,
� NB_RECEIVED is the number of correctly received RLC data blocks (i.e., blocks such that a positive
acknowledgment is reported),
� ρi is equal to the number of information bits in the i-th correctly received RLC data block divided by the number of bits per RLC data block with GMSK modulation (456 in GPRS). This ratio only depends on the coding scheme
used for the i-th correctly received RLC data block and is between 0 and 1 in GPRS and between 0 and 3 in
EGPRS (3 because there are 3 information bits per 8-PSK symbol).
� ni is the number of RLC data blocks in the i-th radio block. Therefore, this number is always equal to 1 for GPRS
and EGPRS for MCS-1 to MCS-6, and is equal to 2 in EGPRS for MCS 7 to MCS 9.
� ρi = 0,40 for CS-1, 0,59 for CS-2, 0.68 for CS-3 and 0.94 for CS-4.
� TX_EFFICIENCY is computed during a fixed window of TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD data blocks and then compared to
threshold (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR if Ack mode and TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR if Nack).
Then if TX_EFFICIENCY < Tx_efficiency_threshold then the TBF is release (abnormally).
� TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR = 10%, TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR = 15%, TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD = 200
all can be set at OMC-R level.
∑
∑
=
==SENTNB
i i
RECEIVEDNB
i i
n
nEFFICIENCYTX
_
1
_
1
i
1100_
ρ
2.602.452.021.300.980.770.650.490.39ρi
MCS-9MCS-8MCS-7MCS-6MCS-5MCS-4MCS-3MCS-2MCS-1
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 106
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 106
9 Exercises
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 107
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 107
9 Exercises
GPRS CS Adaptation
� CS adaptation / DL measurements
� Network parameters:
� MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-2
� TBF_DL_INIT_CS = CS-1
� CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_X_Y = 2
� CS_HST_DL_LT = 2
� CS_HST_DL_ST = 4
� Objective: Find CS used in the DL
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 108
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 108
9 Exercises
GPRS CS Adaptation [cont.]
� Find which CS is used at each measurement
Measurement 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RXQUAL_DL 0 0 2 3 4 5 5 5 6 0 0 0 0 6 7 7
AV_RXQUAL_DL_LT 0,0 0,0 1,1 1,9 2,6 3,3 3,8 4,1 4,5 3,5 2,7 2,1 1,7 2,6 3,5 4,2
AV_RXQUAL_DL_ST 0,0 0,0 1,7 2,7 3,8 4,8 5,0 5,0 5,8 1,2 0,2 0,0 0,0 4,8 6,6 6,9
CS ?
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RXQUAL_DL AV_RXQUAL_DL_LT AV_RXQUAL_DL_ST
Back
Short term average is calculated with AlphaST = 0.2
Short term average is calculated with AlphaLT = 0.8
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 109
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
9 Exercises
RLC ACK Mode: New DL MCS Value Determination (1/3)
APD=0dB, Type 2 ARQ, GMSK table: APD=0dB, Type 2 ARQ, 8PSK table:
if MCScurrent belongs to {1,2,3,4} if MCScurrent belongs to {5,6,7,8,9}
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 16 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 17 5 2 2 2 2 1 1 18 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 29 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10 5 3 3 2 2 2 2 211 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 312 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 313 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 314 5 5 3 3 3 3 3 315 6 5 3 3 3 3 3 316 6 5 3 3 3 3 3 317 6 5 3 3 3 3 3 318 6 5 3 3 3 3 3 319 6 6 5 3 3 3 3 420 6 6 5 5 3 3 3 421 7 6 5 5 3 3 4 422 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 423 7 6 6 6 5 4 4 424 7 7 6 6 5 5 5 425 7 7 7 6 6 5 5 526 7 7 7 6 6 5 5 527 7 7 7 7 6 6 5 528 7 7 7 7 6 6 6 629 7 7 7 7 7 7 6 630 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 731 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 9
CV_BEP
ME
AN
_BE
P
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 11 5 5 5 5 1 1 2 2
2 5 5 5 5 1 2 2 23 5 5 5 5 2 2 3 34 5 5 5 5 2 2 3 35 5 5 5 5 5 3 3 36 5 5 6 5 5 3 3 37 5 5 6 5 5 5 3 38 5 5 6 5 5 3 3 49 7 6 6 6 5 5 5 4
10 7 6 6 6 5 5 5 511 7 6 6 6 6 5 5 512 7 6 6 6 6 6 5 513 7 6 6 6 6 6 5 514 7 6 6 6 6 6 5 615 7 7 6 6 6 6 6 616 7 7 7 7 6 6 6 617 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 618 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 719 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 720 7 7 8 7 7 7 7 721 7 8 8 8 8 7 7 722 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 823 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 824 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 825 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 826 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 927 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 928 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 929 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 930 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 931 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
CV_BEP
ME
AN
_BE
P
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 110
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 110
9 Exercises
RLC ACK Mode: New DL MCS Value Determination [cont.]
� Using the previous LA tables and the following information, fill in the next table:
� APD = 0 dB
� DL RLC mode = ACK
� MS OUT OF MEMORY = Off
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 111
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 111
9 Exercises
RLC ACK Mode: New DL MCS Value Determination [cont.]
� Find which DL MCS is used at each measurement
Back
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8CV_BEP 2 2 2 3 7 5 3 0MEAN_BEP 20 24 24 18 9 8 5 8MCSindNew MCS 4
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 112
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
9 Exercises
RLC ACK Mode: New UL MCS Value Determination (1/3)
APD=0dB, Type 1 ARQ, GMSK table: if MCScurrent belongs to {1,2,3,4}
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 70 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 16 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 17 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 28 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 29 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 210 5 3 2 2 2 2 2 311 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 312 5 5 3 3 3 3 3 313 5 5 3 3 3 3 3 314 6 5 3 3 3 3 3 315 6 5 3 3 3 3 3 316 6 5 5 3 3 3 3 317 6 5 5 3 3 3 3 318 6 5 5 3 3 3 3 319 6 6 5 5 3 3 3 420 6 6 5 5 5 3 3 421 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 422 7 6 6 5 5 5 4 423 7 6 6 6 5 5 5 424 7 6 6 6 6 5 5 425 7 7 7 6 6 5 5 526 7 7 7 6 6 5 5 527 7 7 7 7 6 6 6 528 7 7 7 7 6 6 6 629 7 7 7 7 7 7 6 630 7 7 7 7 7 7 6 631 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 9
CV_BEP
ME
AN
_BE
P
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 113
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 113
9 Exercises
RLC ACK Mode: New UL MCS Value Determination [cont.]
� Using the previous LA table and the following information, fill in the next table:
� APD = 0 dB
� UL RLC mode = ACK
� EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL = enabled
Time allowed:
20 minutes
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 114
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 114
9 Exercises
RLC ACK Mode: New UL MCS Value Determination [cont.]
� Find which UL MCS is used every 12 radio blocks
Back
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12CV_BEP 2 1 2 1 3 7 5 3 0 2 5 7MEAN_BEP 20 20 24 24 18 9 8 5 8 10 18 8MCSindN_inf 0N_sup 0New MCS 2
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24CV_BEP 5 2 1 3 2 1 2 5 2 3 7 3MEAN_BEP 8 7 8 12 16 20 24 10 12 7 20 27MCSindN_inf 0N_sup 0New MCS
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 115
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 115
9 Exercises
Type II ARQ Mechanism
� Replace the ‘?’ by the right values in the 6 next cases:
� Cases 1a, 1b and 1c:
� MS OUT OF MEMORY = Off
� EN_FULL_IR_DL = disabled
� Case 2:
� MS OUT OF MEMORY = Off
� EN_FULL_IR_DL = enabled
� Cases 3a and 3b:
� MS OUT OF MEMORY = On
� EN_FULL_IR_DL = disabled
Time allowed:
20 minutes
Back
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 116
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 116
� Case 1a: MS OUT OF MEMORY = Off, EN_FULL_IR_DL = disabled
MS BSS
DL RLC data block first part B2, MCS?, PS?
EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack (B2 not received)
DL RLC data block second part B2, MCS?, PS?
DL RLC data blocks B3+B4, MCS7, PS1
DL RLC data blocks B5+B6, MCS7, PS1, + polling request
MCS4 commanded by
the Link Adaptation
algorithm
DL RLC data blocks B1+B2, MCS7, PS1
DL RLC data block B7, MCS?, PS?
9 Exercises
Type II ARQ Mechanism [cont.]
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 117
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 117
� Case 1b: MS OUT OF MEMORY = Off, EN_FULL_IR_DL = disabled
MS BSS
DL RLC data block B2, MCS?, PS?
EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack (B2 not received)
DL RLC data block B7, MCS?, PS?
DL RLC data blocks B3+B4, MCS7, PS1
DL RLC data blocks B5+B6, MCS7, PS1, + polling request
MCS5 commanded by
the Link Adaptation
algorithm
DL RLC data blocks B1+B2, MCS7, PS1
9 Exercises
Type II ARQ Mechanism [cont.]
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 118
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 118
� Case 1c: MS OUT OF MEMORY = Off, EN_FULL_IR_DL = disabled
MS BSS
DL RLC data blocks B2+B4, MCS?, PS?
EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack (B2 and B4 not received)
DL RLC data blocks B7+B8, MCS?, PS?
DL RLC data blocks B3+B4, MCS7, PS1
DL RLC data blocks B5+B6, MCS7, PS1, + polling request
DL RLC data blocks B1+B2, MCS7, PS1
9 Exercises
Type II ARQ Mechanism [cont.]
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 119
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 119
� Case 2: MS OUT OF MEMORY = Off, EN_FULL_IR_DL = enabled
MS BSS
DL RLC data block B2, MCS?, PS?
EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack (B2 not received)
DL RLC data block B7, MCS?, PS?
DL RLC data blocks B3+B4, MCS7, PS1
DL RLC data blocks B5+B6, MCS7, PS1, + polling request
MCS4 commanded by
the Link Adaptation
algorithm
DL RLC data blocks B1+B2, MCS7, PS1
9 Exercises
Type II ARQ Mechanism [cont.]
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 120
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 120
� Case 3a: MS OUT OF MEMORY = On, EN_FULL_IR_DL = disabled
MS BSS
DL RLC data blocks B2+B4, MCS?, PS?
EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack (B2 and B4 not received,
MS OUT OF MEMORY = On)
DL RLC data blocks B7+B8, MCS?, PS?
DL RLC data blocks B3+B4, MCS7, PS1
DL RLC data blocks B5+B6, MCS7, PS1, + polling request
DL RLC data blocks B1+B2, MCS7, PS1
9 Exercises
Type II ARQ Mechanism [cont.]
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 121
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 121
� Case 3b: MS OUT OF MEMORY = On, EN_FULL_IR_DL = disabled
MS BSS
DL RLC data block first part B2, MCS?, PS?
EGPRS Packet DL Ack/Nack (B2 not received,
MS OUT OF MEMORY = On)
DL RLC data block second part B2, MCS?, PS?
DL RLC data blocks B3+B4, MCS7, PS1
DL RLC data blocks B5+B6, MCS7, PS1, + polling request
MCS4 commanded by
the Link Adaptation
algorithm
DL RLC data blocks B1+B2, MCS7, PS1
DL RLC data block B7, MCS?, PS?
9 Exercises
Type II ARQ Mechanism [cont.]
Back
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 122
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 122
9 Exercises
NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection
� Master Channel is NOT used
� Network configuration is explained hereafter
� The MS (2W, class B) is selecting a first cell and immediately starts a transfer
� Objective: Find cells selected by the MS
Time allowed:
10 minutesCI=6169
GSM900
CI=1823
GSM900
CI=1964GSM900
CI=6270
GSM900
CI=6271
GSM900 Cell 3 (8557, 1823)
Cell 2 (8564,6169)
Cell 1 (8564, 1964)
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 123
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 123
9 Exercises
NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection [cont.]
� Parameters settings
� For all cells:
� RX_LEV_ACCESS_MIN = -103 dBm
� MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH_= 33 dBm
� PENALTY_TIME = 0 (20s)
� TEMPORARY_OFFSET = 0 dB
� CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET = 0 dB
� CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
� Cell 1: 4 dB
� Cell 2: 6 dB
� Cell 3: 6 dB
CI=6169
GSM900
CI=1823
GSM900
CI=1964GSM900
CI=6270
GSM900
CI=6271
GSM900 Cell 3 (8557, 1823)
Cell 2 (8564,6169)
Cell 1 (8564, 1964)
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 124
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 124
9 Exercises
NC0 Cell Selection and Reselection [cont.]
� Find the cell selected by the MS
CI=6169
GSM900
CI=1823
GSM900
CI=1964GSM900
CI=6270
GSM900
CI=6271
GSM900 Cell 3 (8557, 1823)
Cell 2 (8564,6169)
Cell 1 (8564, 1964)
5
4
3
2
1
Measurements
-77-85-89
-82-87-88
-87-90-88
-100-90-84
-104-96-80
RxLev (3)RxLev
(2)
RxLev
(1)
Back
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 125
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 125
9 Exercises
NC2 Cell Reselection
� Parameters settings
� For all cells:
� RX_LEV_ACCESS_MIN = -103 dBm
� MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH_= P = 33 dBm
� PENALTY_TIME = 0 (20s)
� T_NC_PING_PONG = 0s
� NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET = 0 dB
� THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING = 70 %
� Objectives:
� Fill in the following table
� Find the best candidate cell
Time allowed:
20 minutes
Back
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 126
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 126
9 Exercises
NC2 Cell Reselection [cont.]
� All the cells belong to the same BSS
C2NC2
Load situation
C31NC2
C1NC2
disableddisableddisabledenableddisabledEN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR
0 dB0 dB0 dB+20 dB+20 dBCRO
-90 dBm-90 dBm-90 dBm-75 dBm-75 dBmHCS_THR
-88 dBm-85 dBm-82 dBm-70 dBm-78 dBmAV_Rxlev_NC2
30%20%80%0%10%Load Average
Cell5
umbrella
Cell4
umbrella
Cell3
umbrella
Cell2
micro
Cell1
MicroCell Type
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 127
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 127
9 Exercises
NC2 Cell Reselection [cont.]
� GPRS redirection
� Find a parameter setting ensuring that when the MS enters the Packet Transfer Mode, it is redirected towards a macro cell
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Back
Macro cell
Micro cell Micro cell
GPRSRedirection
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 128
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 128
9 Exercises
Radio Link Supervision
� List in the DL and UL the different cases of abnormal release.
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 129
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 129
Self-assessment on the Objectives
� Please be reminded to fill in the formSelf-Assessment on the Objectivesfor this module
� The form can be found in the first partof this course documentation
Section 1 � Module 3 � Page 130
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10865AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Radio Link Control
1 � 3 � 130
End of ModuleRadio Link Control
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 1
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Do not delete this graphic elements in here:
1�4All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
Module 4Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Section 1Radio Algorithms
EVOLIUME-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10
3FL11830ACAAWBZZA2 Issue 02
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 2
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 2
Blank Page
This page is left blank intentionally
First editionLast name, first nameYYYY-MM-DD01
RemarksAuthorDateEdition
Document History
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 3
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 3
Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
� Estimate qualitatively the impact of a parameter change in order to solve the typical problems or enhance the GPRS performance
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 4
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 4
Module Objectives [cont.]
This page is left blank intentionally
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 5
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 5
Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!Page
1 Optimization of CS Adaptation 72 Optimization of Cell Reselection 103 Enhance the (E)GPRS Performance 17
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 6
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 6
Table of Contents [cont.]
Switch to notes view!
This page is left blank intentionally
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 7
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 7
1 Optimization of CS Adaptation
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 8
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 8
1 Optimization of CS Adaptation
Quiz
� Why CS_QUAL_XX_I_J_X_NACK < CS_QUAL_XX_I_J_X_ACK, by default?
� What is the meaning of CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK = 15?
� What is the meaning of CS_QUAL_UL_3_4_FH_NACK = 0?
Time allowed:
15 minutes
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 9
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 9
1 Optimization of CS Adaptation
Qualitative Impact
� Fill in the table
CS_HST_UL_LT
CS_SIR_DL_3_4_X_Y
CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_X_Y
N_AVG_I
Qualitative ImpactChange
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 10
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 10
2 Optimization of Cell Reselection
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 11
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 11
2 Optimization of Cell Reselection
Cases
� Case 1: Multilayer network with PBCCH
� Use NC0 with C31 and C32
� Case 2: Multilayer network without PBCCH
� Use Outgoing GPRS redirection
� Tuning of NC2 parameters
� Case 3: NC2 parameters versus HO parameters
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 12
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 12
2 Optimization of Cell Reselection
Case 1: Multilayer Network with PBCCH
� Cell reselection for CS traffic
� Aim: favor cell reselection on micro cells for slow mobiles
Macro cell
Micro cell Micro cell
Slowmobiles
CRO=0dB
PENALTY_TIME=20s
TEMPORARY_OFFSET=0dB
CRO=10dB
PENALTY_TIME=60s
TEMPORARY_OFFSET=40dB
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 13
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 13
2 Optimization of Cell Reselection
Case 1: Multilayer Network with PBCCH [cont.]
� Cell reselection for PS traffic
� Aim: favor cell reselection on macro cells for all mobiles
� Use C31 and C32
Macro cell
Micro cell Micro cell
PStraffic
PRIORITY_CLASS=?
HCS_THR=?
PRIORITY_CLASS=?
HCS_THR=?
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 14
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 14
2 Optimization of Cell Reselection
Case 2: Multilayer Network Without PBCCH
� Cell reselection for PS traffic
� Aim: favor cell reselection on macro cells for all mobiles
� Use Outgoing GPRS redirection
Macro cell
Micro cell Micro cell
GPRSredirection
NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR=?
Macro cellLOADED
Micro cell
: NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(micro, Macro)
: NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(Macro, micro)
: NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(micro, micro)
NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR=?
? ? ? ? ?
? ?
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 15
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 15
2 Optimization of Cell Reselection
Case 3: NC2 Parameters Versus HO Parameters
� Link the NC2 parameters to their equivalent HO parameters
NC2
NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD
NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR
NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR
NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
NC_DL_RXLEV_THR
NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
HO
L_RXLEV_DL_H
A_QUAL_HO
L_RXQUAL_DL_H
HO_MARGIN
A_LEV_HO
L_RXQUAL_UL_H
L_RXLEV_DL_H: Downlink level threshold for handover.
A_QUAL_HO: Window size for quality averages for handover.
L_RXQUAL_DL_H: Downlink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls.
HO_MARGIN: Difference in power budget (PBGT) between cell(0) and cell(n) which is required for a power
budget HO.
A_LEV_HO: Window size for level averages for handover.
L_RXQUAL_UL_H: Uplink quality threshold for handover for non-AMR calls.
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 16
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 16
2 Optimization of Cell Reselection
Case 3: NC2 Parameters Versus HO Parameters [cont.]
� Fill in the table
NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
NC_DL_RXLEV_THR
NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR
NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR
NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD
Qualitative ImpactChange
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 17
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 17
3 Enhance the (E)GPRS Performance
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 18
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 18
3 Enhance the (E)GPRS Performance
GPRS Services
Location services• Traffic Conditions• Itineraries• Nearest Restaurant, Cinema, Chemist, Parking, ATM, etc.
Fun• Games (Hangman, Poker, etc.)• Screen Saver• Ring Tone• Horoscope• Biorhythm
MediaAlways-on
M-commerce
Mobile Office• Voice (!)• E-mail• Agenda• IntraNet/InterNet• Corporate Applications• Database Access
Transportation• Flight/train
Schedule
• reservation
Vertical application
•Traffic
Management
•Automation
•Mobile branches
•Health
Music• Downloading ofmusic files orvideo clips
News(general/specific)• International/National News• Local News• Sport News• Weather• Lottery Results• Finance News, etc.
Physical• On-line shopping• On-line food
Non physical• on-line Banking• Ticketing• Auction• Gambling, etc.
Directories• Yellow/White Pages• International Directories• Operator Services
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 19
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 19
3 Enhance the (E)GPRS Performance
GPRS Services vs QoS Criteria
BER E-mail (smtp)
BERFile transfer (ftp)
ThroughputVideo streaming
- Access delay
- Throughput
WEB Browsing (http)
Access delayWAP
Key QoS criteriaGPRS and EGPRS Services
� According to the service type, the QoS criteria to take into account are different
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 20
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 20
3 Enhance the (E)GPRS Performance
Examples
� Data applications use TCP/IP protocol layers which have a great impact on the end user QoS
(*)
First IP router Last IP router
GTP
relay
SNDCPP
BSSGPRLC BSSGP
relay
relay
SNDCPP
PPP
FTP
TCP
IP
PPP
LLC
RLC
MAC
RF
MAC
RF
NS
L1
NS
L1
LLC UDP
IP-Gn
L2
L1’
UDP
IP-Gn
L2
L1’
IP
relay
IP
GTP
IP
relay
IP
relay
IP
UmRGb
Gn GiTE (PC,PDA …)
MSBSS
SGSNGGSN
Possible repartition on the end to end path of the TCP flight size
TCP data segment
TCP acknowledgement
(*) this graphical representation is used toexpress the fact that many data segments arecurrently waiting to be transmitted on therepresented link and are stored in buffers of thedevice handling the link . It doesn’t mean thatsimultaneous segments are being transmitted.
FTP above TCP/IP layers
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 21
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 21
3 Enhance the (E)GPRS Performance
PDU Lifetime and TCP Performance
Time
Throughput
Congestion Window increase CW decrease
CW increase CW decrease
� Impact on TCP performance
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 22
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 22
3 Enhance the (E)GPRS Performance
PDU Lifetime and TCP Performance [cont.]
TCP
server
SGSN GGSN
TCP
server
SGSN GGSN
MFS
MFS
PDU Life Time
TCP/IP frames
TCP/IP frames
LLC frames
LLC frames
TCP Window = 16 KB
TCP Window = 64 KB
We observe a break within each FTP transfer.
We observe within the Gb traces several "LLC Discarded" messages, just before the TCP starts
retransmissions. Those "LLC discarded" messages show that several kilobytes of data are discarded by the
BSS.
This LLC frame discarding is caused by a "PDU lifetime" timer expiry: indeed this parameter is set by the
SGSN to ** 8 seconds **.
Clearly this value is not enough as the RTT (TCP Round Trip Time) with a TCP window of 64 KB is roughly
12.3 seconds.
As most of the RTTs are composed of queuing in the BSS buffers, this inevitably causes PDU lifetime expiry.
This is a normal behavior as at the beginning of a transfer, the FTP server increases continuously its
congestion window. The BSS has to send more and more data with the same radio bandwidth.
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 23
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 23
3 Enhance the (E)GPRS Performance
PDU Lifetime and TCP Performance [cont.]
MFS
FTP
server
SGSN GGSN
PDU Life Time
TCP/IP framesLLC frames
TCP Window = 64 KB
� Solution:
� Increase the PDU Life Time (SGSN parameter)
� PDU Life Time = 63s
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 24
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 24
3 Enhance the (E)GPRS Performance
TCP Window Size and FTP Performance
� TCP/IP packet:
� MSS: The maximum number of user data bytes that can be included in the packet without fragmentation.
� MTU: The maximum number of bytes that can be sent in a single packet.
� TCP window size: the period used for acknowledgment. Its value is a multiple of the MSS (x4, 8, 16, 32). The maximum value is 65.535 (64 KB).
MSS
MTU
TCP/IP Header
40 bytes
MSS: Maximum Segment Size.
MTU: Maximum Transfer Unit.
A too large MTU size may mean retransmissions if the packet encounters a router that cannot handle that
size of packet. A too small MTU size means relatively more header overhead and more acknowledgements
that have to be sent and handled.
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 25
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 25
3 Enhance the (E)GPRS Performance
TCP Window Size and FTP Performance [cont.]
� Maximum throughput obtained with MTU = 1500 bytes and
TCP window size = 8 (x1460 bytes).
The throughput has been calculated at the application layer.
N* is the number which permits to reach, by multiplying the MSS, a Window Size close to the maximal
allowable value of 65.535 Bytes.
The downloaded file has a size of 1 MB.
The table below illustrates the results:
1500 Bytes is the best MTU size because it permits to reach the maximum throughput value. But it is
important to note that even if the MTU size is set to 500 Bytes, the throughput can reach a high value close
to the maximum.
The asymptote characterizing the graph can be explained by the fact that the GPRS network limits the
throughput. Even if the client can receive many TCP packets without acknowledging them, the file
downloading can not be faster.
The recommended value of MTU size should be 1500 Bytes. This value is the best because the TCP window
size, which permits to reach the maximum throughput, is the smallest. In fact, with a small TCP window
size, retransmission can be avoided.
MSS Multiplying
Integer
MTU of 500 Bytes MTU of 576 Bytes MTU of1000 Bytes MTU of 1500 Bytes
4 1.391 1.628 2.95 2.91
8 2.681 2.952 4.016 4.111
16 3.812 3.877 4.045 4.113
32 3.813 3.878 4.043 4.125
N* 3.808 3.88 4.051 4.092
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 26
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 26
Self-assessment on the Objectives
� Please be reminded to fill in the formSelf-Assessment on the Objectivesfor this module
� The form can be found in the first partof this course documentation
Section 1 � Module 4 � Page 27
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10866AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Algorithms Dynamic Behaviors
1 � 4 � 27
End of ModuleAlgorithms Dynamic Behaviors
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 1
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Do not delete this graphic elements in here:
1�5All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
Module 5Appendix
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
Section 1Radio Algorithms
EVOLIUME-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10
3FL11830ACAAWBZZA2 Issue 02
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 2
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 2
Blank Page
This page is left blank intentionally
First editionLast name, first nameYYYY-MM-DD01
RemarksAuthorDateEdition
Document History
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 3
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 3
Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
� Detect the main GPRS QoS problems of the Alcatel-Lucent BSS
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 4
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 4
Module Objectives [cont.]
This page is left blank intentionally
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 5
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 5
Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!Page
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display 71.1 BSS 81.2 Cell 201.3 Adjacency 29
2 System Information Broadcasting 302.1 On BCCH 312.2 On PBCCH 332.3 On PACCH 36
3 MPDCH 374 Handovers for DTM MS 455 Detailed Available Throughput Computation 496 Examples of Puncturing Schemes 537 Extended Cell Overview 598 B10 Features 75
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 6
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 6
Table of Contents [cont.]
Switch to notes view!Page
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 7
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 7
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 8
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 8
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 9
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 9
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 10
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 10
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 11
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 11
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 12
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 12
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 13
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 13
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 14
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 14
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 15
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 15
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 16
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 16
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 17
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 17
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 18
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 18
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 19
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 19
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.1 BSS [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 20
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 20
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.2 Cell B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 21
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 21
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.2 Cell [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 22
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 22
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.2 Cell [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 23
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 23
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.2 Cell [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 24
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 24
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.2 Cell [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 25
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 25
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.2 Cell [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 26
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 26
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.2 Cell [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 27
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 27
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.2 Cell [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 28
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 28
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.2 Cell [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 29
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 29
1 OMC-R B10 Screens Display
1.3 Adjacency B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 30
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 30
2 System Information Broadcasting
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 31
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 31
2 System Information Broadcasting
2.1 On BCCH
� The BCCH indicates if GPRS is supported in the cell:
� SI 3: RA_COLOUR field present if GPRS supported
� If GPRS is supported:
� SI13 is broadcast on the BCCH
� SI13 broadcast instead of retransmission of SI 1
� SI 4 content:
� SI13_PBCCH_LOCATION: gives SI 13 schedule or PBCCH location
B10
Note: do not confuse RA_COLOUR and RA Code. The former is used as a flag which has two uses for the MS
entering a new cell:
� To know if the GPRS service is supported in the cell (RA_COLOUR has a value different from -1).
� To trigger an RA update when the value of the RA_COLOUR changes. It is easy to monitor because it is
broadcast often.
The Routing Area Code is necessary for the RA update procedure (message content).
The SI13 takes the place of a few SI1 occurrences.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 32
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 32
2 System Information Broadcasting
2.1 On BCCH [cont.]
� SI 13 content (non-exhaustive list):
� RA_CODE: routing area code
� NMO: Network Mode of Operation
� PAN_DEC, PAN_INC, PAN_MAX: radio link supervision
� ALPHA: uplink power control
� T_AVG_T, T_AVG_W: MS calculation of average levels
� PC_MEAS_CHAN: level measurements on BCCH / PDCH
� NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER:
� if set to NC0 = MS controlled cell reselection, no measurement reporting
� If set to NC2 = Network controlled cell reselection, thanks to measurement reporting from the MS
� GPRS MA: for hopping SPDCH group
� ACCESS_BURST_TYPE
� DTM_SUPPORT
B10
The MS has to get SI13 information on a regular basis:
� each time the SI13 content is updated (PSI field = SI13_CHANGE_MARK set to 1).
� every 30 seconds max (even if the TBF has to be interrupted).
Through 2 different ways: SI13 on the BCCH or PSI13 in a PACCH block.
The MS has always the time to switch on PSI13 in NMOIII and/or NMOI with a Master PDCH because PBCCH
blocks are always after an I or X TS within the 52 multiframe.
Access Burst Type: it defines the access burst (8 bits or 11 bits) to be used on the PRACH, PTCCH and the
“Packet Control Ack” on a PACCH.
When the Master Channel is present in the cell, the System Information Type 13 message has different
contents from those described above. It mainly consists of:
� The radio description of the Primary Master Channel (in terms of time slot number, training sequence
code and frequency parameters).
� One GPRS Mobile Allocation (MA), if frequency hopping is used for GPRS. This is the GPRS MA of the
Primary Master Channel, if hopping. If the Primary Master Channel is not hopping, the MA corresponds to
the hopping TRX(s) used for GPRS, if any.
Three modes of cell reselection have been defined by the 3GPP Standard for GPRS MSs. These Network
Control (NC) modes, known as the NC0, NC1 and NC2, are shortly described below:
� NC0: the GPRS MS performs autonomous cell reselection without sending measurement reports to the
network.
� NC1: the GPRS MS performs autonomous cell reselection. Additionally it sends measurement reports to the
network.
� NC2: the GPRS MS shall not perform autonomous cell reselection. It sends measurement reports to the
network. The network controls the cell reselection.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 33
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 33
2 System Information Broadcasting
2.2 On PBCCH
� If a primary MPDCH is available, a GPRS MS monitors the PBCCH
� PSI blocks available: PSI1, PSI2, PSI3, PSI3bis, PSI8, PSI13
� PSI1, PSI2 and PSI13 (=SI13 on BCCH) can be sent in a PACCH block for an MS in Packet Transfer Mode
� PSI1 content:
� Cell and BSS parameters
� PRACH access control parameters
� PCCCH organization parameters
� Power Control parameters
� CN features (MSC Release, SGSN Release)
Cell Parameters = NMO, MS Timers, DRX info, RLS parameters, etc.
PRACH access control parameters = access burst type, access control class, etc.
PCCCH organization parameters = BS_PBCCH_BKLS, BS_PAGCH_BLKS_RES, BS_PRACH_BLKS
The GPRS cell adjacencies are the same for an MS in Packet Idle Mode as for an MS in Packet Transfer Mode.
The GPRS cell adjacencies are equal to CS cell adjacencies.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 34
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 34
2 System Information Broadcasting
2.2 On PBCCH [cont.]
� PSI2 content:
� Cell identification (PLMN Id, LAC, RAC, Cell Id)
� Non-GPRS O&M parameters (BS_PA_MFRMS, BS_AG_BLKS_RES)
� PCCCH information (TS and frequencies)
� Cell allocation information (HSN, BCCH band, frequency channels)
� PSI3 /PSI3bis content:
� BCCH allocation in neighboring cells
� Serving cell parameters (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN, GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH)
� General reselection parameters of serving and neighboring cell
� Neighbor cell parameters
PSI3, PSI3bis:
� One PSI3 instance shall be sent and, as a minimum, one PSI3bis instance shall be sent as well
� There may be up to 16 PSI3bis instances.
� Reselection parameters: C31_HYST, C32_HYST, GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYST, PRIORITY_CLASS, HCS_THR,
RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
� Neighboring cell parameters: BSIC, BCCH frequency, SI13 PBCCH location, GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN,
GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH, GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET, GPRS_PENALTY_TIME,
GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET.
� Up to 32 neighboring cells may be defined. The field Same_RA_As_Serving_Cell provides complementary
information for the reselection process.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 35
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 35
2 System Information Broadcasting
2.2 On PBCCH [cont.]
� PSI8 content:
� Optionally sent on the PBCCH
� Cell broadcast information
� CBCH channel description (TS number)
� Frequency parameters for hopping CBCH
� Frequency parameters for non-hopping CBCH (TSC, ARFCN)
TSC: the Training Sequence Code used for CBCH is the BCC value.
MAIO: Mobile Allocation Index Offset.
HSN: Hopping Sequence Number (law for frequency hopping).
MA_bitmap: MA_Bitmap is related to the BCCH band location.
MA_length: the length of the MA_bitmap, giving the number of frequency to hop on.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 36
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 36
2 System Information Broadcasting
2.3 On PACCH
� PSI broadcast on PACCHs is controlled at MAC layer by the O&M parameters T_PSI_PACCH
� PSI13 content:
� GPRS cell access information (RA_CODE, NCO, ACCESS_BURST_TYPE, DTM_SUPPORT , etc.)
� Radio Link Supervision parameters, Power control information
� MS timers for TBF establishment (T3168, T3182, etc.)
B10
When there is no Master Channel, the GPRS mobiles have to read the System Information Type 13 message
at least once every 30 seconds. Because of this, GPRS mobiles in data transfer may lose data. In order to
avoid this, the Packet System Information Type 13 message is sent to each MS doing data transfer, via its
assigned downlink Packet Associated Control Channel (PACCH). This message provides the same information
as the System Information Type 13 message on BCCH. The PSI Type 13 message is not used when there is a
Master Channel.
The GPRS cell information as well as the Radio Link Supervision and the Power Control information are
similar to the one included in the SI13 on the BCCH.
T3168, T3164, T3182, T3190, T3180: refer to their use for TBF establishment and Radio Link Control (causes
of TBF releases at the MS side). We can note that the MS timer names use even numbers when the BSS one
uses odd numbers.
T_PSI_PACCH = 14s (Alcatel recommended value) but it can be set at OMC-R level.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 37
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 37
3 MPDCH
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 38
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 38
3 MPDCH
Details on the MPDCH
� Logical channels dynamically multiplexed:
� PBCCH, PCCCH
� Identified by the PCCCH group (used for paging purposes)
� Primary Master Channel
� PBCCH carrier, indicated in SI13
� Static allocation
� Secondary Master Channels: additional MPDCH
� PRACH, PPCH and PAGCH carrier
� NB_TS_MPDCH = Number of TSs reserved for MPDCHs (Primary + Secondary)
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 39
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 39
3 MPDCH
Details on the MPDCH [cont.]
� Master channels configuration
� On the BCCH TRX
� Starting from the left
� BCCH and SDCCH are not overwritten
� Example
� NB_TS_MPDCH = 4
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 40
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 40
3 MPDCH
Details on the MPDCH [cont.]
� MPDCH configuration
� Downlink multi-frame
� primary MPDCH: the first BS_PBCCH_BLKS blocks of the ordered list (B0, B6, B3, B9, B1, B7, B4, B10, B2, B8, B5, B11) are reserved for PBCCH
� Secondary MPDCH: the first BS_PBCCH_BLKS blocks of the ordered list above are reserved for PAGCH
� BS_PAG_BLKS_RES: number of blocks reserved for PAGCH, after reservation of PBCCH blocks
� remaining blocks are used for PPCH, PAGCH
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 41
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 41
3 MPDCH
Details on the MPDCH [cont.]
� Example of DL Primary Master Channel:
� BS_PBCCH_BLKS=2
� BS_PAG_BLKS_RES=6
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 42
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 42
3 MPDCH
Details on the MPDCH [cont.]
� MPDCH configuration
� Uplink multi-frame
� PRACHs occur on any PDCH carrying MPDCH
� PRACH blocks are statically allocated on the BS_PRACH_BLKS first blocks of the ordered list:
B0, B6, B3, B9, B1, B7, B4, B10, B2, B8, B5, B11
� blocks are marked by USF=free
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 43
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 43
3 MPDCH
Exercise
� Fill in the blocks of a DL secondary MPDCH multiframe having thefollowing criteria:
� BS_PBCCH_BLKS=2
� BS_PAG_BLKS_RES=6
� Fill in the blocks of a UL PDCH multi-frame having the following criterion:
� BS_PRACH_BLKS=4
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 44
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 44
3 MPDCH
Exercise [cont.]
� DL multiframe: secondary MPDCH
� BS_PBCCH_BLKS=2
� BS_PAG_BLKS_RES=6
� UL multiframe:
� BS_PRACH_BLKS=4
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
?????
?????
?????
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
PAGCH
PAGCH
PPCH, PAGCH
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
?????
?????
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
PRACH
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
CAUTION: animated slide
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 45
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 45
4 Handovers for DTM MS
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 46
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 46
4 Handovers for DTM MS
Characteristics
� Handover should be avoided as much as possible since they interrupt the PS connection for a while.If the MS is in DTM MODE( with both CS and PS service), see next slide.
� Low priority Inter-cell HO are forbidden for MS operating in DTM
� Scenario for CS handover
� MS in DTM in the serving cell
� Handover CMD sent to the MS
� MS abnormally releases the TBF
� MS enters target cell in dedicated mode
� TBFs are re-established in the new cell in DTM
B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 47
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 47
Family Cause Inter-cell HO causeHO cause
number
Behavior when the
MS is in DTM
Emergency Inter-cell HO Too low quality on the UL cause 2 Enable
Emergency Inter-cell HO Too low level on the UL cause 3 Enable
Emergency Inter-cell HO Too low quality on the DL cause 4 Enable
Emergency Inter-cell HO Too low level on the DL cause 5 Enable
Emergency Inter-cell HO Too long MS-BS distance cause 6 Enable
Emergency Inter-cell HO Consecutive bad SACCH frames received in a microcell cause 7 Enable
Emergency Inter-cell HO Too low level on the UL, inner zone cause 10 Disable
Emergency Inter-cell HO Too low level in the DL, inner zone cause 11 Disable
Better conditions Inter-cell HO Power budget cause 12 Enable
Better conditions Inter-cell HO Too high level on the UL & DL, outer zone cause 13 Disable
Better conditions Inter-cell HO
High level in neighbor lower or indoor cell for slow
mobile cause 14 Disable
Emergency Inter-cell HO Too high interference level on the UL cause 15 Enable
Emergency Inter-cell HO Too high interference level on the DL cause 16 Enable
Emergency Inter-cell HO
Too low level on the UL in a microcell compared to a
high threshold cause 17 Enable
Emergency Inter-cell HO
Too low level on the DL in a microcell compared to a
high threshold cause 18 Enable
Forced directed retry HO Forced directed retry cause 20 Enable
Better conditions Inter-cell HO High level in neighbor cell in preferred band cause 21 Disable
Emergency Inter-cell HO Too short MS-BS distance cause 22 Enable
Better conditions Inter-cell HO Traffic HO cause 23 Disable
Better conditions Inter-cell HO General capture HO cause 24 Disable
Channel adaptation intra-cell HO HR-to-FR channel adaptation due to bad radio quality cause 26 Disable
Channel adaptation intra-cell HO FR-to-HR channel adaptation due to good radio quality cause 27 Disable
Better conditions Inter-cell HO Fast traffic HO cause 28 Disable
Resource management intra-cell HO TFO HO cause 29 Disable
Resource management intra-cell HO Move from PS to CS zone cause 30 Disable
InterRat HO 2G-3G HO cause 31 Enable
4 Handovers for DTM MS
Characteristics [cont.] B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 48
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 48
MS Old BTS BSC MFS MSC
[old FACCH]
[old SACCH]
New BTS
Dedicated mode
Meas Rep. Measurement Result
HO decisionPhysical Context Req.
Physical Context Conf.
Chan. Act (new TCH)
Chan. Act ACK
DR[HO CMD]HO CMD
[new FACCH]Handover Access HO Detect
SABMEst. Ind.
UA
HO Complete DI[HO CMP]Handover Performed
BSC Shared DTM Info Ind (new cell)
BSC Shared DTM Info Ind (old cell)
4 Handovers for DTM MS
Handover Scenario B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 49
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 49
5 Detailed Available Throughput Computation
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 50
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 50
5 Detailed Available Throughput Computation
Formula
� available_throughput_candidate_XL is � the overall throughput provided by its PDCHs
� It depends on:
� the potential throughput of its PDCHs� potential_throughput_PDCH
� the available capacity on each of its PDCHs
� available_capacity_PDCH_XL
� For a GPRS TBF� Potential_throughput_PDCH = R_AVERAGE_GPRS
� Available_capacity_PDCH_XL = (1 – USED_CAPACITY_GBR_XL * (1 + QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN/100)) / (Nb_BE_TBF_HIGHER_PRIOR_XL*SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR + Nb_BE_TBF_SAME_PRIOR_XL + 1)
� Same formulas are used for an EGPRS TBF with R_AVERAGE_EGPRS and only the EGPRS TBFs are considered
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 51
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 51
5 Detailed Available Throughput Computation
Formula [cont.]
� USED_CAPACITY_GBR_XL� total PDCH capacity that has already been allocated to RT PFCs (both GPRS and EGPRS) on the PDCH in the XL direction
� RT PFCs: Real Time Packet Flow Context
� Nb_BE_TBF_HIGHER_PRIOR_XL (respectively Nb_BE_TBF_SAME_PRIOR_XL) � total number of Best Effort TBFs (GPRS or EGPRS)
� which have some radio resources allocated on the considered PDCH in the XL direction
� and whose priority (combination of THP and Precedence) is strictly higher than (respectively equal to) the priority of the TBF to establish / reallocate
� THP: Traffic Handling Priority� QoS parameter used for the interactive traffic class
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 52
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 52
5 Detailed Available Throughput Computation
Formula [cont.]
� For a given candidate time slot allocation with n PDCHs
� available_capacity_candidate_XL = ∑i=1 to n available_capacity_PDCHi_XL
� available_throughput_candidate_XL = potential_throughput_PDCH * available_capacity_candidate_XL
� For a GPRS TBF, in case of only BE TBFs with the same priority
� available_throughput_candidate_XL = R_AVERAGE_GPRS *
� For a GPRS TBF, in case of only BE TBFs with the same priority
� available_ throughput _candidate_XL = R_AVERAGE_EGPRS *
∑= +
n
1i PDCHi 1NB_TBF
1
∑= +
n
1i PDCHi 1NB_TBF
1
Back
NB_TBFPDCHi represents the number of already allocated GPRS and EGPRS TBFs on the PDCH i, in case of
GPRS allocation.
NB_TBFPDCHi represents the number of already allocated EGPRS TBFs on the PDCH i, in case of EGPRS
allocation.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 53
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 53
6 Examples of Puncturing Schemes
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 54
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 54
6 Examples of Puncturing Schemes
Puncturing Schemes and MCS
� The 05.03 GSM recommendation (Channel coding) indicates for eachMCS the available puncturing schemes
PS1, PS2, PS3MCS-9
PS1, PS2, PS3MCS-8
PS1, PS2, PS3MCS-7
PS1, PS2MCS-6
PS1, PS2MCS-5
PS1, PS2, PS3MCS-4
PS1, PS2, PS3MCS-3
PS1, PS2MCS-2
PS1, PS2MCS-1
PS of last transmission before MCS switch
PS of first transmission after MCS switch
MCS switched from
MCS switched to
The puncturing process consists of transmitting only some of the coded bits obtained after the rate 1/3
convolutional coding. Depending on the considered puncturing scheme, different coded bits are
transmitted. Therefore, when the receiver receives two versions of the same RLC block sent with two
different puncturing schemes, it obtains additional information leading to an increased decoding
probability.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 55
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 55
P2 P3 P1 P2
puncturing puncturing
1404 bits
USF RLC/MAC
Hdr.
36 bits
Rate 1/3 convolutional coding
135 bits
468 bits
612 bits 124 bits 36 bits SB = 8
1392 bits
45 bits
Data = 448 bits BCS TB
468 bits
612 bits 612 bits
1404 bits
Rate 1/3 convolutional coding
FBI E Data = 448 bits BCS TB FBI E
612 bits 612 bits 612 bits
P3 P1
3 bits
HCS
puncturing
6 Examples of Puncturing Schemes
Coding and Puncturing for MCS-7
� Coding and puncturing for MCS-7; rate 0.76 8PSK, two RLC blocks per 20ms
For MCS-7, the data part of the RLC block contains 468 bits. The rate 1/3 convolutional coding gives 1404
bits: C(0), C(1), ..., C(1403). The code is then punctured depending on the value of the CPS field as defined
in the 04.60 GSM recommendation. Three puncturing schemes named P1, P2 and P3 are applied in such a
way that the following coded bits are transmitted:
The result is a block of 612 (8*78 - 12) coded bits.
P1 {C(18j), C(1+18j), C(4+18j), C(8+18j), C(11+18j), C(12+18j), C(13+18j), C(15+18j)
for j = 0,1,...,77} are transmitted
except {C(k) for k = 1,19,37,235,415,595,775,955,1135,1351,1369,1387} which are not transmitted
P2 {C(2+18j), C(3+18j), C(5+18j), C(6+18j), C(10+18j), C(14+18j), C(16+18j), C(17+18j)
for j = 0,1,...,77} are transmitted
except {C(k) for k = 16,34,52,196,376,556,736,916,1096,1366,1384,1402} which are not transmitted
P3 {C(2+18j), C(5+18j), C(6+18j), C(7+18j), C(9+18j), C(12+18j), C(13+18j), C(16+18j)
for j = 0,1,...,77} are transmitted
except {C(k) for k = 13,31,49,301,481,661,841,1021,1201,1363,1381,1399} which are not
transmitted
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 56
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 56
6 Examples of Puncturing Schemes
Coding and Puncturing for MCS-5
� Coding and puncturing for MCS-5; rate 0.37 8PSK, one RLC block per 20 ms
P2 P1
puncturing
1404 bits
USF RLC/MAC
Hdr. Data = 56 octets = 448 bits BCS
36 bits
Rate 1/3 convolutional coding
99 bits
468 bits
1248 bits 100 bits 36 bits SB = 8
1392 bits
33 bits
TB E FBI HCS
3 bits
1248 bits
+1 bit
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 57
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 57
P1 P3 P2
puncturing
1116 bits
USF RLC/MAC
Hdr. Data = 44 octets = 352 bits BCS
12 bits
Rate 1/3 convolutional coding
108 bits
372 bits
372 bits 68 bits 12 bits SB = 12
464 bits
36 bits
TB E FBI HCS
3 bits
372 bits 372 bits
puncturing
6 Examples of Puncturing Schemes
Coding and Puncturing for MCS-4
� Coding and puncturing for MCS-4; uncoded GMSK, one RLC block per 20 ms
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 58
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 58
P1 P2
puncturing
588 bits
USF RLC/MAC
Hdr. Data = 22 octets = 176 bits TB
12 bits
Rate 1/3 convolutional coding
108 bits
196 bits
372 bits 68 bits 12 bits SB = 12
464 bits
36 bits
BCS
puncturing
HCS E FBI
3 bits
372 bits
6 Examples of Puncturing Schemes
Coding and Puncturing for MCS-1
� Coding and puncturing for MCS-1; rate 0.53 GMSK, one RLC block per 20 ms
Back
For MCS-1, the data part of the RLC block contains 196 bits. The rate 1/3 convolutional coding gives 588
bits: C(0), C(1), ..., C(587). The code is then punctured depending on the value of the CPS (Coding and
Puncturing Scheme indicator) field (EGPRS RLC/MAC header) as defined in the 04.60 GSM recommendation
(RLC/MAC). Two puncturing schemes named P1 and P2 are applied in such a way that the following coded
bits are not transmitted:
The result is a block of 372 (588 - 8*28 + 8) coded bits.
P1 {C(2+21j), C(5+21j), C(8+21j), C(10+21j), C(11+21j), C(14+21j), C(17+21j), C(20+21j) for j =
0,1,...,27} are not transmitted except {C(k) for k = 73,136,199,262,325,388,451,514} which are
transmitted
P2 {C(1+21j), C(4+21j), C(7+21j), C(9+21j), C(13+21j), C(15+21j), C(16+21j), C(19+21j) for j =
0,1,...,27} are not transmitted except {C(k) for k = 78,141,204,267,330,393,456,519} which are
transmitted
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 59
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 59
7 Extended Cell Overview
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 60
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 60
� One BTS (G3 or G4): 2 cells
� INNER cell: range from 0 to 35 km
� OUTER cell: range from 33 to 70 km
7 Extended Cell Overview
Presentation - General
The extended cell has up to 4 TRX in the inner cell and up to 4 TRX in the outer cell.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 61
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 61
7 Extended Cell Overview
Presentation - Synchronization
OUTER cellINNER cell
� Freq BCCH OUTER <> Freq BCCH INNER
� MS reports measurements on both cells for the handover algorithms
� BSICINNER = BSICOUTER
� INNER cell can decode the RACH received on OUTER BCCH frequency
� INNER cell always BARRED
� MS always camps on OUTER cell
At the border of the two cells, an overlapping area allows to provide a continuous coverage. When the MS
moves from one cell to the other, a handover is triggered in the overlap zone. Two BCCH channels are
needed (one for the inner cell, one for the outer cell), so that the MS reports measurements on both cells
for the handover algorithms.
The TRXs of the inner cell and of the outer cell are synchronised, but the reception of the outer cell is
delayed by 60bits period to account for the propagation delay.
In the inner cell, the MS can receive the BCCH inner frequency as wells as the outer BCCH frequency. To
avoid to manage RACH reception on two different frequencies in the inner cell, the MS is forced to access
the inner cell on the outer BCCH frequency. For this purpose, the RACH reception (BCCH TRX) of the inner
cell is tuned to the outer BCCH frequency, and the inner cell is barred1. So on time slot 0 of the inner cell,
transmission is done on the inner cell BCCH frequency, and reception is done on outer BCCH frequency.
The chosen implementation allows to make use of all timeslots2 of the TDMA frame and to use the
combined configuration for the CCCH channel.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 62
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 62
� UL interference on TS0 of the INNER cell if
� Access burst received in the INNER cell (on frequency BCCH OUTER)
AND
� Call on TS7 of the OUTER cell
� Then, TS7 of the OUTER cell is always set to IDLE (never used)
7 Extended Cell Overview
Presentation - RF Interference
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 63
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 63
7 Extended Cell Overview
Radio Link Establishment - MS Located in the Outer Cell Area
The inner cell is always barred, so the MS cannot camp on the inner cell, even if located in the inner cell range. In the
whole extended cell coverage, the MS has a good reception of the outer cell BCCH, so the MS will always be camping in
the outer cell, whether in the inner cell or outer cell range.
For this reason, a special radio and link establishment procedure is used to cope with this behaviour .
It consists of receiving the CHANNEL REQUEST messages on outer BCCH frequency, and allocating the SDCCH channel
according to the MS estimated position. The IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND for an SDCCH is sent on the outer cell
BCCH frequencies, but the SDCCH may be allocated in either inner or outer cell, depending on the MS position.
(1) The MS camping on the outer cell sends an access burst on the RACH on outer cell BCCH frequency. These bursts will
be received successfully in the inner cell by the BCCH TRE. In the outer cell, the access burst arrives too early and
cannot be decoded.
(2) The inner cell BCCH TRE sends a CHANNEL REQUIRED message to the BSC containing the random reference sent by
the mobile, the TDMA frame number when the message was sent over the air and the measured TOA.
(3) The TCU controlling this TRE allocates an SDCCH subchannel to the transaction in the inner cell and asks the BTS to
activate this subchannel.
(4) The BTS activates the requested channel and sends back and acknowledgement, once this is done.
(5) The TCU sends the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND (which provides the description of the allocated SDCCH) to
the BCCH TRE of the inner cell.
The TCU controlling the inner cell BCCH sends a copy of the message to the TCU handling the BCCH of the outer cell.
This is done if and only if the timing advance IE included in the CHANNEL REQUIRED is smaller than 60, thus indicating
that the MS is strictly in the inner cell (in order to avoid that the MS receives two Immediate Assignment messages when
located in the overlap zone).
The TCU controlling the outer cell BCCH forwards the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND to the outer cell BCCH TRE.
(6) The IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message is sent over the air to the MS on the AGCH of the outer cell.
(6') The IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message sent by the inner cell is lost, because the MS listens to the outer cell
frequency.
(7) The mobile switches its transceiver to the SDCCH allocated in the inner cell and sends repeatedly an SABM frame to
establish the layer 2 connection with the BTS.
(8) The BTS acknowledges the establishment of the LapDm link to the MS with a UA frame sent on the SDCCH allocated
to the MS.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 64
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 64
If TA < 60
7 Extended Cell Overview
Radio Link Establishment - MS Located in the Inner Cell Area
The TCU sends the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND (which provides the description of the allocated
SDCCH ) to the BCCH TRE of the inner cell.
The TCU controlling the inner cell BCCH sends a copy of the message to the TCU handling the BCCH of the
outer cell. This is done if and only if the timing advance IE included in the CHANNEL REQUIRED is smaller
than 60, thus indicating that the MS is strictly in the inner cell (in order to avoid that the MS receives two
Immediate Assignment messages when located in the overlap zone).
The TCU controlling the outer cell BCCH forwards the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND to the outer cell
BCCH TRE.
(1) The MS in the outer cell sends an access burst on the RACH of the outer cell. This burst is successfully
received by the outer cell BCCH TRE. In the inner cell, the access burst arrives too late to be successfully
decoded.
(2) The outer cell BCCH TRE sends a CHANNEL REQUIRED message to the BSC containing the random
reference sent by the mobile, the TDMA frame number when the message was sent over the air and the
measured TOA.
(3) The TCU controlling this TRE allocates an SDCCH subchannel in the outer cell to the transaction and asks
the BTS to activate this subchannel.
(4) The BTS activates the requested channel and sends back an acknowledgement, once this is done.
(5) The TCU then sends the description of the channel in the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND to the
outer cell BCCH TRE.
(6) The IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message is sent over the air to the MS on the AGCH of the outer cell.
(7) The mobile switches its transceiver to the required channel and sends repeatedly an SABM frame to
establish the layer 2 connection with the BTS.
(8) The BTS acknowledges the establishment of the LAPDm link to the MS with a UA frame sent on the
SDCCH allocated to the MS.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 65
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 65
7 Extended Cell Overview
Radio Link Establishment - MS Located in the Overlap Zone
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 66
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 66
�
7 Extended Cell Overview
Radio Link Establishment - MS Located in the Overlap Zone [cont.]
(1a&b) The MS camping on the outer cell sends an access burst on the RACH. This burst is correctly received by the inner cell BCCH TRE
and outer cell BCCH TRE.
(2a&b) The inner cell and outer cell BCCH TRE send a CHANNEL REQUIRED message to the BSC containing the random reference sent by
the mobile, the TDMA frame number when the message was sent over the air and the measured TOA.
(3a&b) Both TCUs controlling the TREs having BCCH allocate an SDCCH subchannel to the transaction and ask the BTS to activate this
subchannel.
(4a&b) The BTS activates the requested channels and sends back an acknowledgement for each, once this is done.
(5b) The TCU controlling the outer cell, sends the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND with SDCCH description in the outer cell to the
outer cell BCCH TRE.
(5a&c)The TCU controlling the inner cell sends in the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND with SDCCH description in the inner cell. Two
cases are possible:
� Access Delay IE > 59 the inner cell TCU will not send a copy of the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT command to the outer cell TCU. This is
the desired behaviour.
� Access Delay in [58,59] range, the inner cell TCU sends a copy of the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT command to the outer cell TCU. This is
not the desired behaviour (corresponds to inner cell scenario). This is due to the fact that the BSC definition of the overlap zone does
not match the exact BTS overlap area (negative values of TOA in the outer cell up to –2, are clipped to 0).
(6b) The IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message describing the SDCCH allocation in outer cell, is sent to the MS on the outer cell BCCH
frequency. In most cases this message should be received by the MS (except if 6c is received first)
(6a) The IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message describing the SDCCH allocation in inner cell is lost on the inner cell air interface, because
the MS does not listen to that frequency. The unused SDCCH will be released by the BSC when the supervising timer expires6.
(6c) Access Delay in [58,59] range: The IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message describing the SDCCH allocation in inner cell is sent on the
BCCH frequency of the outer cell. In most cases, the MS should have received message (6b) before and has already switched to the
SDCCH in the outer cell, and so this message is lost. It is however possible, in case the message (6b) is delayed in the inner cell, that
the message (6c) is received earlier by the MS. In this case establishment will occur on the SDCCH allocated in the inner cell (not
drawn).
(7b) The mobile receives the IMMEDIATE ASSIGNEMENT describing the SDCCH allocation in outer cell on the BCCH outer cell frequency.
It then switches to the designated channel and sends repeatedly an SABM frame to establish the layer 2 connection with the BTS in the
outer cell. If the message (6c) is received before (6b), then the establishment will occur in the inner cell.
(8b) The BTS acknowledges the establishment of the LapDm link to the MS with a UA frame sent on the SDCCH allocated to the MS.
(9) The unused SDCCH is released in the inner cell (double SDCCH allocation). If message 6c arrives first, then the unused SDCCH
release will occur in the outer cell.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 67
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 67
� CAUSE 6: Too long distance
AV_RANGE_HO > U_TIME_ADVANCE
and EN_DIST_HO = ENABLE
� U_TIME_ADVANCE = 62
� EN_PBGT_FILTERING = Disable
7 Extended Cell Overview
Handover - from the INNER cell to the OUTER Cell
In the extended cell , the handover procedure is purely controlled by settings of the handover detection
parameters. Two special causes allow handover from the inner cell to the outer cell and handover from the
outer cell to the inner cell. There is no change in the BSC handover algorithm either for handover
preparation or execution.
From the inner cell to the outer cell , the handover alarm is only triggered by the handover cause “too long
MS-BS distance”. When this cause is triggered the extended outer cell is always a candidate cell.
However the operator setting of the handover parameters must insure that this cause is only triggered when
the distance from the serving inner cell BTS is greater than the limit of the overlap zone (TA > 62) by
setting U_TIME_ADVANCE to 62.
In order to avoid the extended outer cell to be filtered by the filtering process the flag
EN_PBGT_FILTERING must be set to DISABLE.
The candidate cell evaluation process is recommended to be the GRADE mode.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 68
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 68
� CAUSE 22: Too short distance
AV_RANGE_HO < L_TIME_ADVANCE
� L_TIME_ADVANCE = 0
� EN_PBGT_FILTERING = Disable
� Cause 22 is only checked if
� Cell_range(serving) = extended_outer
7 Extended Cell Overview
Handover - from the OUTER cell to the INNER Cell
In the same way, from the outer cell to the inner cell , the handover alarm is only triggered by the
handover cause “too short MS-BS distance”. When this cause is triggered the extended inner cell is always a
candidate cell.
However the operator setting of the handover parameters must insure that this cause is only triggered when
the timing advance applied by the mobile reaches 0, this is achieved by setting L_TIME_ADVANCE to 0.
In order to avoid the extended inner cell to be filtered by the filtering process the flag
EN_PBGT_FILTERING must be set to DISABLE.
The candidate cell evaluation process is recommended to be the GRADE mode.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 69
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 69
� All the standard HO causes can be used
� Emergency HO causes 2, 3, 4, 5
� Better condition HO causes 12, 23, 24
� The OUTER or INNER cell is always present in the Candidate CellEvaluation
7 Extended Cell Overview
Handover - from the OUTER or INNER Cell towards Another Cell
The setting of the handover parameter does not prevent any handover cause to trigger an alarm for a
handover towards a third cell.
It is possible to use exactly the same rules and parameters for handover towards a third cell as in the macro
cellular normal cases.
The synchronous handover does not work between the inner and the outer cell.
In order to avoid call terminations due to directed retry into the inner or outer cell with an incorrect
distance range it is recommended to disable the forced directed retry towards the inner and the outer cell.
For this purpose, the parameter FREELEVEL_DR(n) is set to the maximum value (255) for the inner and the
outer cell.
But the Normal DR can be activated.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 70
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 70
� The Inner Cell shall always be BARRED
� If combined CCCH/SDCCH is used in the inner extended cell, then the same configuration is required in outer extended cell, and vice-versa (ie same in both cells)
� BSICINNER = BSICOUTER
� The TS 7 of BCCH TRX of outer cell must be set to IDLE
� The INNER cell and OUTER cell must belong to the same location area
� Synchronous handover must be disabled.
� U_TIME_ADVANCE = 62
� L_TIME_ADVANCE = 0
� EN_PBGT_FILTERING = DISABLE.
� CELL_EV = “Grade”
� FREELEVEL_DR(n) = 255 (this is done automatically, at configuration time)
� INNER cell and OUTER cell must be neighbour, handover relationship must exist in both directions
7 Extended Cell Overview
CS Parameters Setting
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 71
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 71
7 Extended Cell Overview
Packet Service
� Activation of the PS service in an Extended cell
� No specific parameter is foreseen
� Same procedure as the one used for standard cell is applied� TRX_PREF_MARK = 0
� If used, PS must be activated in both INNER and OUTER cell
� Reselection
� Because the INNER cell is barred
� this cell should must not be declared in the neighbor cells reselection adjacencies
� NC2 is not allowed
� NACC and (P)SI STATUS are not allowed
� The Master channel is not allowed in both INNER and OUTER cell
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 72
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 72
7 Extended Cell Overview
Packet Service [cont.]
� Packet access procedure (1/2)
� Same principle as in CS, since it’s performed on CCCH only
� The MS always performs its access on the RACH of the outer BCCH frequency
� The BTS provides the BSC with the initial TA
� Depending on the TA value, the BSC chooses the suitable cell (INNER or OUTER)
� In UL, whatever the multislot class of the MS, only one PDCH is allocated
� Its right or left TS can not be allocated neither for PS nor for CS (see comment)
� This TS is considered as a restricted TS by the MSF
� The same constraint is applied in DL for the TS carrying the PACCH
UL
Restricted
Allocated
Restricted
Allocated
INNEROUTER
When a MS passes from inner/outer cell to outer/inner cell, the TA estimated by the BTS stalls
progressively. So the MS is not able to apply the suitable correction of its TA for its uplink transfer (data
and/or signaling). This leads progressively to the impossibility for the BTS to decode the uplink radio blocks
because they shift out of their allocated RTS.
For a given MS, its uplink radio blocks progressively come out of its allocated RTS and jams the neighbor
RTS.
� It jams the right RTS when the MS moves from inner to outer cell. This right RTS can also be the RTS0 of
the next TDMA frame if the RTS7 is allocated to a TBF.
� It jams the left RTS when the MS moves from outer to inner cell. This left RTS can also be the TS7 of the
previous TDMA frame if the RTS0 is allocated to a TBF.
If the neighboring RTS is dedicated to other MS for PS or CS call, this jam causes interferences on these RTS
and the BTS can not decode the radio blocks of those MS leading to the drop of these calls.
This drawback only occurs for the uplink direction. The downlink direction does not raise any problem.
To overcome this drawback, some radio resource allocation constraints are to be applied:
� An UL TBF is only allocated on one RTS.
� On BCCH or non BCCH inner TRX,
� A RTS is allocable to a UL TBF if its right RTS is allocated for PS traffic to the MFS, and is not used by
a UL TBF.
� When a RTS is allocated, its right RTS cannot be allocated to PS call.
� On BCCH or non BCCH outer TRX,
� A RTS is allocable to a UL TBF if its left RTS is allocated for PS traffic to the MFS, and is not used by
a UL TBF.
� When a RTS is allocated, its left RTS cannot be allocated to PS call.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 73
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 73
7 Extended Cell Overview
Packet Service [cont.]
� Miscellaneous
� In the OUTER cell, the maximum MCS is limited to MCS-4
� The Streaming TBFs (i.e. RT PFC) are not supported
� The INNER and OUTER cells must be mapped on the same GPU
� The INNER and OUTER cell must belong to the same routing area
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 74
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 74
7 Extended Cell Overview
PS Parameters Setting
� NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0
� EN_NACC = Disable
� EN_PSI_STATUS = Disable
� NB_TS_MPDCH= Disable
� MAX_PDCH, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD and MIN_PDCH must be set to even values (see comments)
� EN_STREAMING = Disable
As in UL TBF allocation, the MFS uses at least 2 TS (a “restricted” one and the one allocated in UL) the
number of PDCH allocable in the extended cells (MAX_PDCH, MIN_PDCH, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD ) must be
even.
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 75
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 75
8 B10 Features
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 76
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 76
8 B10 Features
Summary
� B10 MR1
� All B9 MR4 Features
� Dual Transfer Mode (simultaneous CS and PS traffic)
� GTTP usage
� Improved delayed UL TBF Release
� B10 MR2
� Extended Dynamic Allocation (more than 2 TS in UL)
B10
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 77
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 77
Self-assessment on the Objectives
� Please be reminded to fill in the formSelf-Assessment on the Objectivesfor this module
� The form can be found in the first partof this course documentation
Section 1 � Module 5 � Page 78
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3JK10867AAAAWBZZA Issue 02
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
EVOLIUM � E-GPRS Radio Algorithms and Parameters Description B10Radio Algorithms � Appendix
1 � 5 � 78
End of ModuleAppendix
@@SECTIONTITLE - @@MODULETITLE
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2007@@PRODUCT
@@COURSENAME
@@SECTION - @@MODULE - 1
D R A F T
� Switch to notes view!
This page is left blank intentionally
Copyright © 2007 by Alcatel-Lucent - All rights reservedPassing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel